JP7075009B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number value for lottery when a gaming ball enters the starting port, and temporarily stores the random value up to a predetermined upper limit as an operation pending ball. Each such operation-holding ball is sequentially digested one by one each time a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a hit / fail determination as to whether or not it corresponds to a big hit is executed. If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the decorative symbol consisting of multiple rows is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is opened. A special game (big hit game) that is in a state is established.

It is known that this type of pachinko gaming machine is provided with a large number of fluctuation patterns in order to increase variations such as reach effect and pseudo-continuous effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714

Since there are already many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the interest of the game in order to differentiate it from the conventional models.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a game board in which a game area is formed, a start port provided in the game area where a game ball can enter, and a start port. A random number acquisition means for acquiring a predetermined random number value triggered by the entry of the game ball, and a hit / fail determination means for executing a hit / fail determination based on the hit / miss random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means. , The fluctuation pattern determining means for performing the main variation pattern lottery for determining the main variation pattern based on the main variation pattern random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means, and the variation pattern determining means. Based on the main fluctuation pattern, the symbol display device in which the special symbol showing the result of the hit / fail judgment is variable-displayed and stopped-displayed, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit, the game shifts to a special game that is advantageous to the player. The special game execution means to be obtained, the effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect, and the effect determining means for determining the effect to be displayed on the effect display device are provided, and the predetermined random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means is provided. Based on the random number value of the main variation addition pattern, the main variation addition pattern lottery is performed, the basic variation time of the special symbol is specified by the main variation pattern, and the special symbol is specified by the main variation addition pattern. The variable addition time is specified, and the variation display time of the special symbol is the total time of the basic variation time of the special symbol specified by the main variation pattern and the variation addition time of the special symbol specified by the main variation addition pattern. The sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern corresponding to the combination of the main variation pattern determined in the main variation pattern lottery and the main variation addition pattern determined in the main variation addition pattern lottery are configured to consist of. It is possible to determine and execute an effect corresponding to the sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern, and a plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and / or a certain main variation addition pattern. One sub-variation pattern among a plurality of sub-variation patterns is determined, and a plurality of sub-variation addition patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and / or a certain main variation addition pattern, and the plurality of subs are associated with each other. It is characterized in that it is configured to determine a sub-variable addition pattern of one of the variable addition patterns. ..

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the staging control board of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / failing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a transition diagram of a game state and an effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern selection state table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 4. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 5. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 6. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the composition of the variation addition effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a main variation pattern, a main variation addition table, and a main variation addition pattern. It is a schematic diagram which provides the explanation of the main variation addition pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the sub-variation pattern table (for off). It is a schematic diagram which shows the sub-variation pattern table (for big hit). It is a schematic diagram which shows the sub-variation addition pattern table (for loss 1). It is a schematic diagram which shows the sub-variation addition pattern table (for loss 2). It is a schematic diagram which shows the sub-variation addition pattern table (for big hit 1). It is a schematic diagram which shows the sub-variation addition pattern table (for big hit 2). It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of a variation addition effect. (A) is a schematic diagram of a companion participation effect pattern table, (B) is a schematic diagram of an aura connection effect pattern table, and (C) is a schematic diagram of an aura use effect pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the companion participation production and the aura connection production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the aura use effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the pseudo-continuous fanning effect. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the other characteristic configuration 1 of the variation addition effect. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the other characteristic configuration 2 of the variation addition effect. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the reserved image display area and the changing image display area. It is a schematic diagram which shows the holding image and the changing image of a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change look-ahead lottery table of a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the first hold) of a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the second hold) of a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the third hold) of a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the fourth hold) of a normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold image and the changing image of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change look-ahead lottery table of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the first hold) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the second hold) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the third hold) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold change pattern table (the fourth hold) of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the hold change effect of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the special hold change effect of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the holding image and the changing image of the normal mode of the modification 1. It is a schematic diagram which conceptually shows the layer structure of the staging display device of modification 1. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect example of the hold change effect of the normal mode of the modification 1. It is a schematic diagram which shows the holding image and the changing image of the normal mode of the modification 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation display of the holding image and the changing image of the normal mode of the modification 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect example of the hold change effect of the normal mode of the modification 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production flow of a battle production. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen of the battle effect, (B) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the internal value of the meter counter and the level of the meter image, and (C) is the timing of meter update and the upper limit of the internal value. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relation with a value. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation validity period of the production button of a phantom fight rush mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production flow of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of the suppression chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the schematic diagram used for the explanation of the base suppression effect table (progress pattern). It is a schematic diagram which shows the lottery table of the base control effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the remaining number of times notification effect and the mode branch effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the time chart of the standby demo production. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 62 of the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 74 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the staging control side. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the staging control side. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interrupt processing.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The front view and the rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined with reference to this figure. The pachinko gaming machine PM according to this embodiment is a model in which two functions equivalent to those of the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and is the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game. It is possible to develop a game (second special symbol game).

<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machines>
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as “gaming machine PM”) is aligned with the front surface of the opening of the outer frame 1 forming the vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer square frame size. The front frame 2 which is configured in the size of a square frame and forms an opening / closing mounting frame is attached to the front right edge so that it can be opened / closed and detached sideways by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 arranged on the front left edge of each other. It is always held in a closed state engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided.

A rectangular glass frame 5 matching the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and the locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state that covers the front surface of the front frame 2. The game board 20 is detachably set and held in the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the double glazing of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker 11 that generates a sound effect according to the development status of the game are provided. Upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 8 and lower ball plate 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and an effect of being pressed by a player in the center of the front of the upper ball plate 8 is produced. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for launching a game ball is provided on the front right side of the lower ball plate 9. In the following, for convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as "effect button 15", but the effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button type switch and an output according to the direction of operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotation-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch sensor , Touch panel, etc., used in concepts that include all operation input means.

The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. Further, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 form a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA, and the position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (inner rail 42). A ball return prevention valve 43 is provided at the tip end portion) to prevent the game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various types such as a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, an operating gate 53, a large winning opening 54, and a general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64, etc. In addition to the winning opening, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol hold lamp 73, the second special symbol hold lamp 74, the ordinary symbol display device 75, the normal symbol hold lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21.

The game area PA is a left side area PA1 which is a left side area of the center decoration 21 (a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and a right side area of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to right-handed hitting) with the center decoration 21 in the center as a reference. It is divided into a right side area PA2 which is a board area). A top plate portion 22 facing the outer rail 41 in the substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center decoration 21, and is located between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the guide passage. A connecting passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right side region PA2 is formed. In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can mainly enter any of the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has rolled down without entering each winning opening to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51 is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a game ball hit to the left) that mainly flows down the left side region PA1 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to the right-handed hit, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) which mainly flows down the right side area PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522 generally referred to as an electric chew, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522. The ordinary electric accessory 522 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52 or is difficult to enter. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity described later (an opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). In the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a front-rear slide type movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) in which the second starting port 52 is closed to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and the second starting port 52 is opened to allow the game ball to enter. It is possible to slide in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between the open position (retracted position) and the easy opening position (retracted position). The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to incline downward from the right side to the left side in the front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a taxiway, and the game ball can flow down on the taxiway from right to left. It flows down toward you and falls from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

The actuating gate 53 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the actuating gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 52.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontally rectangular shape that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In this example, the large winning opening 54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in special games (big hit game, small hit game), when launching a game ball, by hitting at the right side area PA2, so-called right-handed hit, it is easy to enter the big winning opening 54. It has become.

The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side region PA1 which is a board surface region corresponding to left-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 include a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like, and the game ball to any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is configured. It is also possible to detect incoming balls.

The general winning opening 64 is arranged in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 includes a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, but the opportunity to acquire the prize ball like the other winning openings (excluding the operating gate 53). It becomes.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and definite display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and definite display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The first special figure holding lamp 73 and the second special figure holding lamp 74 are composed of, for example, two LED lamps, respectively, and the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is increased by the lighting / blinking display of the lamps. Express (up to 4 each). The number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is the number related to the random number value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. There is, and the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, the number in which the pass / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the pass / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value is shown. Similarly, the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is a random number value acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. This is the number to which the acquired random value is suspended, that is, the number for which the pass / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the pass / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value. There is.

The ordinary symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and definite display of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of hold of normal symbol changes (the number of normal symbol changes that have not yet been executed). A round display 77 is provided on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75 to display the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (number of rounds: number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated). ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes a variable effect of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed / stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and an effect of predicting or notifying the expectation of a big hit. In addition to displaying the image, the hold display corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display area 700 for executing variable display of decorative symbols, a notice effect display, and the like, a first special figure hold lamp 73, and a second special figure hold lamp 74. In synchronization with There is. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 70. The decorative symbol display unit 700 has three rows of display areas (left symbol display area Z1, middle symbol display area Z2, right symbol display area Z3) that are variable display areas of decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) Is provided, the left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the left symbol display area Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle symbol display area Z2, and the right of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right symbol display area Z3. Each symbol is stopped and displayed. The hold image display unit 710 displays a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of entry) of the activated reserved balls of the special symbol, and the maximum of 4 reserved images of the 1st special symbol and the maximum 4 reserved images of the 2nd special symbol are displayed. It can be displayed. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing variable display is displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that executes an effect operation according to the development status of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. Further, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “directing lamp LP”.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described. On the back side of the front frame 2, there are upper and lower back set boards 30 based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape that is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 and has a window that communicates back and forth in the center. It is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so as to be able to open / close and attach / detach sideways. A rectangular box-shaped back set cover 30C with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the staging control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 is connected to a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. A prize for guiding the game ball paid out from the ball supply passage portion 33, the prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out the game ball guided by the ball supply passage portion 33, and the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM, a production control board 200 that controls the overall production, image display according to the game development, and sound effect control. An image control board 300, etc. for performing the above are attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, a payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of the game ball, and power is received from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic parts. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) that outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the power supply board 500 and the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30. Arranged. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) to enable the pachinko gaming machine PM to operate.

<Control configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3 additionally, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores control programs, various data, and the like, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and a buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and peripheral boards and each. It is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and the main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform the main control over the progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 has a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and resets the main CPU 101 when it malfunctions or goes out of control. It operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, the CTC circuit that enables the generation of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (built-in random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off, and is used when the power is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored). ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area.

Further, the main control board 100 is electrically formed with a first starting port switch 511, a second starting port switch 521, an operating gate switch 531, a large winning opening switch 541, a left general winning opening switch 611, a right general winning opening switch 641 and the like. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special symbol hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a normal symbol hold lamp. In addition to being electrically connected to the 76, it is electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are transmitted via the I / O port circuit 104. It is transmitted to the display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. The external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 and the staging control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in one direction from the main control board 100 to the staging control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the main control board 100, and data transmission cannot be requested to the main control board 100.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores the effect control program and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, and the like. It is equipped with a production control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute the main control related to the game effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset when the sub-main CPU 201, which is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, malfunctions or goes out of control. WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and for input / output serial data It is equipped with serial communication circuits, etc., which are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing an image and sound to the image control board 300 in an effect control process based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Ramp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The staging control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and an image control command related to image and sound is transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the image control board 300, and as a response thereof, the effect control board 200 is transmitted. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the staging control board 200.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 adopt clock-synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off the switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Therefore, the drive current is supplied or cut off to the effect lamp LP, and the effect lamp LP is controlled to be turned on or off.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching the switch in the circuit on / off based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the staging control board 200. Alternatively, it is shut off to control the operation of each movable accessory 24. A parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image production based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores an image control program, various data, and the like, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. It is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured to include a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. , The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control related to the image effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301, and the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, and reads image data stored in an image ROM in response to an instruction from a sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits the video signal (image data) generated by image processing to the effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from an image ROM is connected to this VDP. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the voice ROM in response to the instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by the synthesis processing to the speaker 11 via the amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be bidirectionally communicable, and controls for driving the prize ball payout unit 34 to pay out the prize balls based on the payout control command from the main control board 100. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the launching handle 12 to control the launching of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 has a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board and a backup power supply based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island. It is configured with a backup power supply circuit for generating power and a power supply cutoff monitoring circuit for monitoring power supply cutoff due to voltage drop, and is a power supply required for electronic and electrical parts such as each control board and gaming equipment. Supply. A power switch for activating the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board 500, and it is assumed that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, and when the power supply switch is turned on, the power supply board A predetermined power supply is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit of 500. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is cut off, and when the power supply cutoff is detected, the power supply cutoff signal (NMI signal) for notifying the fact is sent to the main control board 100. , Transmission to the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value is connected to the power supply board 500 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the gaming information signal from the main control board 100. External information signals output by the external information terminal plate 600 to an external device outside the machine as external information include, for example, a jackpot signal, a continuous villa signal, a symbol confirmation signal, a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, and a magnetic sensor abnormality signal. , Disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included, but since they are known techniques, the description thereof will be omitted below. Further, the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM includes a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display can be a useful judgment material for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall inside the gaming store, and makes each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without going through a data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko gaming machines>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked, and the pachinko machine PM is used for the game. The game is started by storing the game ball in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8 are sent out to the launching mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feeding mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5. It is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated with less than a predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side region PA2 and flows down the left side region PA1. In this left side region PA1, a left side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the first starting port 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side region PA2 and flows down the right side region PA2. In the right side region PA2, a right side flow path for flowing the game ball toward the operating gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 is formed. The game balls flowing down the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA2 in this way have the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operating gate 53 according to the paths distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , The large winning opening 54 and the general winning opening 61 to 64 can be entered, but if the ball is not entered in any of the winning openings, the ball is flowed down to the out opening 29.

When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first starting port 51, the second starting opening 52, the large winning opening 54, and the general winning opening 61 to 63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning opening is awarded. The ball is paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, as the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters each prize opening (referred to as "unit prize ball number"), the first starting port 51 is "4" and the second. The starting opening 52 is set to "1", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the large winning opening 54 is set to "15". The number of unit prize balls for each winning opening is not limited to that illustrated in the present embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the first starting opening 51 is "4", the second starting opening 52 is "3", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are "5", and the large winning opening is "10". And so on.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, a lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an operation holding ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined start condition (a change start condition of a special symbol described later) is satisfied, a hit / fail determination, a symbol determination, and a variation pattern determination of the special symbol are performed on the lottery random number value related to the earliest operation holding ball. The special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70 in an manner corresponding to this determination result. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the big winning opening 54 is changed to the open state only once or a plurality of times. When a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the large winning opening 54 reaches the opening time limit, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, an embodiment in which three types of symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the jackpot, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, if a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined final number of times. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (big hit game) will occur relatively early. Become. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the number of fluctuation display times until the next big hit occurs.

In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be activated in association with or independently of the function for changing the probability of the special symbol. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lottery per unit time is improved (big hit per unit time). Ease of acquisition can be increased).

Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the electric chew support function (also simply referred to as "electric support") may be activated in association with or independently of the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The electric chew support function enhances the ease of entering the second starting port 52 by operating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522. It is a state (also referred to as a "easy-to-enter state"). When the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than that in the normal state. When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a high possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 will also increase. It also increases the possibility that the number of balls entered will increase. Therefore, by activating the electric chew support function, the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 52 increase during that period, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls of the game ball, becomes high. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chew support function is operating is also referred to as a “high base state”, and the state in which the electric chew support function is not operating is also referred to as a “low base state”.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko gaming machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / staging control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 4. Note that FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / staging control board 200).

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, and a normal symbol lottery processing means 145. It includes a special game control means 150, a symbol display control means 155, an electric accessory control means 160, a game state control means 165, an error monitoring control means 170, a main information storage means 180, and a command transmission / reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means on the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional expression of something.

The ball entry determining means 110 is based on detection signals from the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, and the like, and each winning opening. Judge the entry of the game ball into. When the ball entry determination means 110 detects the entry of a game ball by the first start port switch 511, the ball entry determination means 110 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “first start port winning command”) to that effect, and the first 2 When the entry of the game ball is detected by the start opening switch 521, an effect control command (referred to as “the second start opening winning command”) indicating that effect is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 is used to generate the game ball. When the passage is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operation gate winning command") is generated to indicate that fact, and when the large winning opening switch 541 detects the entry of a game ball, it indicates that fact. When an effect control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated and a game ball entry is detected by the general winning opening switch 611, 641, an effect control command ("general winning opening" indicating that effect is detected. A winning command) is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The game lottery random number generation means 120 is used for a winning / failing lottery of a special symbol by taking in a built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding a soft random number per special symbol described later to the built-in random number. Generate a random number per special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as a random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the initial value for performing a new update after the update of one cycle of the special symbol per soft random number added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for the hit random number generation and the special symbol per soft random number is completed. Soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining, special symbol stop symbol random number used for determining the hit symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number Special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for new update after one cycle of update is completed, special symbol fluctuation pattern random number for selection of special symbol variation pattern, Special symbol variation addition pattern random number to be used for selection of special symbol variation addition pattern, normal symbol per random number to be used for normal symbol win / fail lottery, and new random number per ordinary symbol after one cycle update is completed. It includes an initial value random number per normal symbol for determining an initial value for updating, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number for selection of a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol, and the like. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random number is not executed while the timer interrupt process is not executed (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.). (During loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random value related to the special symbol game, which is a random value per special symbol, per special symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 or the second start port 52. The symbol random value, the special symbol variation pattern random value, and the special symbol variation additional pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in which the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is combined with the entry order of the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Temporarily stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of 180.

In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area) and the hold 2 storage area (2) are in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52. A hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided. Each reserved storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, a random number of special symbol variation patterns, and a random number value of a special symbol variation additional pattern as a set of operation pending ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage. It is digested in the order of areas (principle of first-in first-out). Further, when the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage area, respectively. Hold 4 Clears the contents of the storage area to zero.

Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 has a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball count counter. The special symbol hold control means 131 increments the corresponding counter by 1 each time it acquires one special symbol operation hold ball as an update process of the number of operation hold balls of the special symbol, and one operation hold ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

Further, when the special symbol hold control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command including the update information of the hold ball number (“symbol memory”). A number command) is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. As a general rule, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they are entered, but in the present embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation hold ball related to the second special symbol game exists, the operation hold related to the second special symbol game is held regardless of the existence of the operation hold ball related to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere. Under this priority digestion, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is digested. It will be put on hold.

The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, which is a random number value per normal symbol, a symbol random value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operating gate 53. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation holding ball information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 stores the operation hold ball information of the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in the form of being combined with the entry order of the hold balls. Temporarily memorize. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter for each acquisition of one normal symbol hold ball as an update process of the number of hold balls of the normal symbol, and one action hold ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the pre-determination means 135 acquires the operation-holding ball of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 executes a pre-determination for pre-reading notice for the operation-holding ball. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-judgment timing, when (1) waiting for a hit and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and Either when the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is operating, or when the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit. It is time to meet the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-judgment timing is an example, and the pre-judgment timing is changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol having no ordinary electric accessory, and eight pieces are reserved at normal times. For models that can store pachinko machines, the above (1) can be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.), or even if a specification that makes a pre-judgment at any time without setting a pre-judgment timing is adopted. good. Further, in each game state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be the target of the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state, it is preferable that only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation hold ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether or not the result is correct. Pre-judgment (pre-judgment of hit / fail), pre-judgment of symbol (pre-judgment of symbol), and pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern (pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers in each of the pass / fail pre-judgment table, the symbol pre-judgment table, and the variation pattern pre-judgment table is divided into a plurality of areas. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the pre-judgment (also referred to as a "pre-judgment number")) is assigned to each of these areas (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery (result of winning / failing determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination) by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later. It should be noted that the winning / failing pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determining table, and the like may be the same as the winning / failing lottery table, the symbol lottery table, and the like used for the lottery when the fluctuation is actually started. Here, the fluctuation pattern pre-determination table is used for the game status at the start of fluctuation (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a time reduction, whether or not it is during a limited frequency period during which a special fluctuation pattern table is referenced, the number of reserved balls, etc.). As described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included in the region. Further, as a modification, it is configured to predetermine a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area. You may. Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / failing determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143. When the change start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 is stored in the earliest storage area (reserved 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180. The stored special symbol per random value, special symbol per symbol random value, special symbol variation pattern random value, special symbol variation additional pattern random value is read out, and this is used as the special symbol hit / fail determination area of the main information storage means 180, the special symbol. It is stored in the symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area, respectively. Here, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (A3). ) When all the conditions of the existence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol are satisfied. In addition, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (B3). It is when all the conditions that the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists is satisfied. When the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is preferentially processed under the above-mentioned priority digestion. do.

The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol winning / failing determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a winning / failing determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and miss. Decide if you want to. The result of this hit / fail determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H"), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 holds a special symbol winning / failing lottery table referred to at the time of this winning / failing determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table. FIG. 5A is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and FIG. 5B is a gaming state (high probability) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. State). In the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated in the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, the random number value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 204". In the gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, a big hit is obtained when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 1506". That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1 / 319.69" to the high probability "1 / 43.49". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is set equally between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the hit / miss determination of the special symbol. The winning probability of a small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 has a first special symbol jackpot symbol table and a second special symbol that are referred to when determining a jackpot symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means the special symbol after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of. In the present embodiment, when a specific jackpot is won, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the jackpot game, and the game continues until the next jackpot occurs. Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the "specific jackpot" or the "normal jackpot" is won, the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot game is played. It continues until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 100 times) from the end or until the next big hit occurs.

FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random value, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are displayed. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, eight types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, as eight types of jackpot types (symbol group), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C), and 4R Specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D), 4R jackpot 5 (symbol group E), 4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F), 4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G), and 4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H). ) And. For the 4R specific big hits 1 to 5, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is "4 rounds", and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is "28 seconds". In the 4R normal jackpots 1 to 3, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is "28 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are set for the symbol random value per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three types of jackpots (symbol group) are divided into 16R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group I), 16R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group J), and 2R normal jackpot (symbol group K). .. In the 16R specific jackpots 1 and 2, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "16 rounds", and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is "28 seconds". In the 2R normal jackpot, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "2 rounds", and the opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is "3 seconds".

Of the various jackpot types, "4R specific jackpot 1-5", "4R normal jackpot 1-3", and "16R specific jackpot 1 and 2" have the longest winning opening 54 in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit type that triggers the execution of a round game that opens for a time (28 seconds) (also referred to as a "long open round game"). On the other hand, the "2R normal jackpot" is an opportunity for a round game (also referred to as a "short open round game") in which the jackpot 54 is opened for a short time (3 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit type. In the present embodiment, in the long-open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 allows or easy entry of a game ball having a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) into the large winning opening 54. It is a round game set to. In the short open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or is difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54. It is a game. Therefore, the expected value of winning the prize ball in the big hit game increases in the order of "2R normal big hit" <"4R specific big hit 1 to 5", "4R normal big hit 1 to 3" <"16R specific big hit 1, 2".

Subsequently, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent probability game state, and a probability variation game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chew support function are activated is called "probability change state" or "probability change game state", and ( 2) The gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric chew support function are not activated is called "latent gaming state" or "latent probability state", and (3) special. The gaming state in which the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the symbol probability variation function is activated is called "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (4) all functions are activated. The state in which the game is not performed is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable game state", the "latent probability game state", and the "time-saving game state" are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". Therefore, in the following, as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, the latent probabilistic gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state are also referred to as an advantageous gaming state.

In addition, each gaming state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variable game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". At this time, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol is activated, at least the variation time of the first special symbol (normal game state) in the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game. In the game state (probability variation game state, latent probability game state, time-saving game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game, the variation time of at least the second special symbol (average variation time) is shortened. Time) is shortened.

FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the present embodiment. In the game state setting table, the number of operations of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (electric chew support function) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game is set for each jackpot type (type of symbol group). ing. In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (1) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (2) game at the time of big hit winning. Determined according to the condition. The number of times each game state is continued (the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed) is the number of times that the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (referred to as "the number of probability fluctuations") and the function of shortening the variation time of the special symbol is activated. It is set according to the number of times (referred to as the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time") and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated (referred to as the "number of times of electric support"). In addition, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol start the operation at the same time and end the operation at the same time, the "variation time reduction number" and the "electric support number" are the same. It is the number of times (for that reason, the description of "the number of times of electric support operation" is omitted in FIG. 8).

(4R specific jackpot 1)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000" and the number of fluctuation time reductions is "20". "Times" and the number of times of electric support "20 times" are set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 20 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 20 times. When the probability variation game state ends when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 20 times, the transition to the latent probability game state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving gaming state, a latent probability gaming state, or a probability variation gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "10000 times", and the number of times of electric support "10000 times" are set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. In this probabilistic game state, a huge number of times of continuation (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number, electric support number) is set as "10000 times", and the jackpot must not be won until the continuation number is reached. Is unlikely to occur stochastically (winning at about 1/44), so it will continue until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 2)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000" and the number of fluctuation time reductions is "40". "Times" and the number of times of electric support "40 times" are set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 40 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 40 times. When the probability variation game state ends when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 40 times, the transition to the latent probability game state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving gaming state, a latent probability gaming state, or a probability variation gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "10000 times", and the number of times of electric support "10000 times" are set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 3)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000" and the number of fluctuation time reductions is "60". "Times" and the number of times of electric support "60 times" are set, and the probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 60 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 60 times. When the probability variation game state ends when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 60 times, the transition to the latent probability game state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving gaming state, a latent probability gaming state, or a probability variation gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations "10000 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "10000 times", and the number of times of electric support "10000 times" are set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 4)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000 times", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "10000 times" is set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued until the next big hit occurs.

(4R specific jackpot 5)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000 times", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "10000 times" is set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued until the next big hit occurs.

(4R normal jackpot 1)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state or the latent gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "0" and changes. The time reduction number "20 times" and the electric support number "20 times" are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 20 times, or until the next big hit occurs within these 20 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches 20 times, the game shifts to the normal game state from the next change display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "0 times". The number of times of shortening the fluctuation time is set to "100 times" and the number of times of electric support is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

(4R normal jackpot 2)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state or the latent gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "0" and changes. The time reduction number of times "40 times" and the electric support number of times "40 times" are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 40 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 40 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 40 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "0 times". The number of times of shortening the fluctuation time is set to "100 times" and the number of times of electric support is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

(4R normal jackpot 3)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group H)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal gaming state or a latent gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "0" and changes. The time reduction number "60 times" and the electric support number "60 times" are set, and the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 60 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 60 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 60 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variable display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)" is won, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the number of probability fluctuations is "0 times". The number of times of shortening the fluctuation time is set to "100 times" and the number of times of electric support is set to "100 times", and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

(16R specific jackpot 1)
When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group I)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000 times", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "10000 times" is set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued until the next big hit occurs.

(16R specific jackpot 2)
When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group J)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000 times", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000 times", and the number of fluctuations is reduced, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of support times "10000 times" is set, and the probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probabilistic gaming state is substantially continued until the next big hit occurs.

(2R normal jackpot)
When the second special symbol "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the electric support is performed regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The number of times "100 times" is set, and the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. In this time-saving game state, the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed reaches 100 times, or
Continue until the next big hit occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “main variation pattern”) based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting the main variation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between this fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines multiple types of main variation patterns. In each figure, "selectivity" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, the judgment value (range of random value) for determining the main fluctuation pattern is determined according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. It is set, and the main fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value belongs to.

In the present embodiment, the execution time (variation time) of the variation display of the special symbol is composed of the total time of the "basic variation time" and the "variation addition time". The "basic fluctuation time" is specified based on the type of fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol. The "variable addition time" is specified based on the type of the variable addition pattern (also referred to as "main variable addition pattern") of the special symbol described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol means the total time obtained by adding the "variation addition time" specified by the main fluctuation addition pattern to the "basic fluctuation time" specified by the main fluctuation pattern. do.

Here, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection state will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection state table in the present embodiment. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table) of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the six types of variation pattern selection states are "selection state 1", "selection state 2", "selection state 3", "selection state 4", "selection state 5", and "selection state 6". It is set.

The selection state 1 is a variable pattern selection state set in accordance with the normal gaming state or the latent gaming state. Further, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the variable display when the currently executing effect mode is the "normal mode" or "special mode" described later.

The selection states 2 to 4 are variable pattern selection states set in accordance with the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state. In addition, this selection state 2 is a variation display (1st to 19th rotations, 21st to 39th rotations, 41st to 59th rotations) other than the branch game when the currently executing production mode is the "suppression chance mode" described later. , From the 61st rotation to the next big hit). The selection states 3 and 4 are set corresponding to the variation display (20th rotation, 40th rotation, 60th rotation) of the branch game when the currently executing production mode is the "suppression chance mode" described later. .. Here, the selected state 3 corresponds to a branch game in which the suppression chance mode continues, and the selected state 4 corresponds to a branch game in which the suppression chance mode ends.

The selection state 5 is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state. Further, this selection state 5 is set corresponding to the variable display when the currently executing production mode is the “phantom fight rush mode” described later.

The selection state 6 is a variation pattern selection state set in response to the time-saving gaming state. Further, this selection state 6 is set corresponding to the variable display when the currently executing effect mode is the “revenge mode” described later.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even so, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation hold balls (“hold 0”, “hold 1-2”, “hold 3”) described in each figure is, if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, if it is a lottery. It means the number of activated reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of activated reserved balls after pending digestion), and in the case of the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of activated reserved balls of the second special symbol (after pending digestion). It means the number of operation holding balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the variation display / after the hold digestion) (excluding the operation-holding balls digested by the variation display). .. As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. In addition, during the limited frequency period (a state in which a special fluctuation pattern table is referred to, and in particular, a period in which a fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation in a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state is selected), the first special symbol, Regardless of the second special symbol, the variation pattern lottery may be performed using a common table, and in that case, it is particularly desirable to use the common table when selecting the out-of-order variation pattern. When selecting a jackpot variation pattern, the types of special games that can be executed may differ depending on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so it is common to select the variation pattern corresponding to the type of special game. It is desirable not to use the table.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a reference, FIGS. 10 to 15 also describe the contents of the variation effect set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are effects in which the three rows of decorative symbols fluctuate and become "off" in so-called disjointed eyes without going through the reach state even once. Is. In the following, ultra-shortening fluctuations, shortening fluctuations, and normal fluctuations are collectively referred to as "non-reach loss". In this non-reach deviation, the variation mode is different from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time in the shortened variation than in the normal variation and in the ultra-shortened variation than in the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative symbol is stopped in two rows (generally the left column and the right column) of the three rows of decorative symbols (reach state), and the remaining one row (general). If a different decorative symbol stops in the middle row), it will be "missing", and if the same decorative symbol stops in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row), it will be a "big hit". In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of N reach is not set, but of course, the fluctuation pattern of N reach may be set.

"SP reach (super reach)" is a reach production with a relatively higher expectation of big hits than the above N reach, and it evolves from the N reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action are displayed. It is a reach production. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to D are prepared as the types of SP reach. SP reach A to C are reach effects executed when the effect mode currently being executed is a normal mode or a special mode. "SP Reach A" is a reach production in which two main characters (one ally character and one fellow character) appear. "SP Reach B" is a reach production in which three main characters (one ally character and two fellow characters) appear. "SP Reach C" is a reach production in which four main characters (one ally character and three fellow characters) appear. The SP reach A to C are SP reach that can be selected when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "big hit" when the currently executing effect mode is the normal mode or the special mode. In this embodiment, it is shown that the jackpot expectation is high in the order of "SP reach A"<"SP reach B"<"SP reach C". That is, the higher the number of main characters (fellow characters) appearing in the SP reach (SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C), the higher the expectation of a big hit. If a fellow character appears in the fellow participation production that will be described later before developing into the SP reach A to C, it is guaranteed that the fellow character that appeared in this fellow participation production will also appear in the SP reach. In other words, of the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters that appeared in the fellow participation production will also appear in SP Reach A to C (the number of fellow characters appearing in the fellow participation production ≤ the number of fellow characters in the SP reach production). Number of characters). Therefore, the number of fellow characters appearing in the companion participation production guarantees the minimum number of companion characters appearing in the SP reach, and the occurrence of SP reach of the type or more corresponding to the minimum number of people is guaranteed. .. For example, if two fellow characters appear in a special production, a fellow participation production (one of the new productions added during fluctuations), if the fellow character develops into SP reach after this fellow participation production is performed, the fellows will participate. It is assured that the number of characters appearing is 2 or more (the number of main characters appearing is 3 or more), that is, the character develops into SP reach B or more (SP reach B or SP reach C). As a modification, it is not necessary to be assured, and when a fellow character appears in the fellow participation production that will be described later before developing into this SP reach A to C, the fellow character that appeared in this fellow participation production becomes SP reach. In other words, even if there is a high possibility that at least the fellow characters that appeared in the fellow participation production will also appear in SP Reach A to C among the three fellow characters. Often, for example, if two fellow characters appear in a fellow battle production, if the SP reach develops after this fellow battle production is performed, the number of fellow characters will be two or more (the number of main characters will be three). It may be a specification that has a high possibility of developing into SP reach B or higher (SP reach B or SP reach C). The details of the companion participation production will be described later. On the other hand, "SP reach D" is a reach effect that can be executed in any effect mode. This "SP reach D" is a battle reach in which a fellow character plays against an enemy character. Note that, unlike "SP reach A to C", "SP reach D" is selected only when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit (when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is wrong). Is not selected). The details of SP Reach D (Battle Reach) will be described later.

In the "pseudo-ream", the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variablely displayed during the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable display is performed multiple times in a pseudo manner. It is an effect that makes it look like (pseudo continuous effect, pseudo change effect, pseudo continuous change effect, re-variation effect). The pseudo-continuous effect is a predetermined effect (predetermined effect) in which a pseudo-variation in which all three rows of decorative symbols start to change or re-change and then temporarily stop or definitely stop is executed a plurality of times. Hereinafter, the number of pseudo-variations is also referred to as “pseudo-ream number”. In the variation display in which the number of pseudo-reams is 2, the period from the start of the variation to the temporary stop is the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation"), and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is The second pseudo-variation (referred to as "pseudo-two variation") is from the start of the re-variation to the definite stop. In the variation display in which the number of pseudo-reams is 3, the period from the start of the variation to the temporary stop is the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation"), and the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is The period from the start of the re-variation to the temporary stop is the second pseudo-variation (referred to as "pseudo-two variation"), and the period from the start of the re-variation to the definite stop of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol. This is the third pseudo-variation (referred to as "pseudo-three variation"). Even in the variation display that does not develop into a pseudo-ream, for convenience of explanation, the period from the start of the variation to the definite stop may be referred to as the "pseudo-1 variation" by imitating the first pseudo-variation. .. It is shown that the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with high expectation of big hits. In addition, of the three columns of decorative symbols, when the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the reach state (tempai), the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state. Expectations for big hits are higher than in the case. Further, when the decorative symbols in the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state or the reach state, the jackpot expectation is high depending on the type of the decorative symbols in the left column. As an example, the decorative symbols of "1" and "5" have higher expectation of big hits than the decorative symbols of "2", "4", "6" and "8", and the decorative symbols of "1" and "5" have higher expectations. The decorative symbol of "3" has a higher expectation of a big hit, and the decorative symbol of "7" has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the decorative symbol of "3". It should be noted that increasing the number of pseudo-reams from the first to the second and from the second to the third is also referred to as "pseudo-ream continues".

"Pseudo 1 fanning" is an effect of fanning whether or not to progress to the next pseudo variation (second pseudo variation) during the execution of the pseudo 1 variation (first pseudo variation). "Pseudo 2 fanning" is an effect of fanning whether or not to progress to the next pseudo variation (third pseudo variation) during the execution of the pseudo 2 variation (second pseudo variation). In the following, "pseudo 1 fanning" and "pseudo 2 fanning" may be collectively referred to as "pseudo continuous fanning (pseudo continuous fanning effect)". In the pseudo-ream effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed among the three rows of decorative symbols, and a predetermined pseudo-ream symbol (details of the pseudo-ream symbol will be described later) as the middle symbol (final symbol). ) Is a specific effect (specific effect) that encourages whether or not the temporary stop is displayed after being variablely displayed in the vicinity of the predetermined temporary stop position. When the next pseudo-variation is performed (when the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is successful), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position, and when the next pseudo-variation is not performed (pseudo-continuous fanning effect is performed). (If it fails), the pseudo-ream symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position, and other decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or the pseudo-ream symbol is not displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position. Only the symbol continues to display variable (for example, if it is in the tempai state, it develops into SP reach). In addition, in the present embodiment, before performing this pseudo-repeating (pseudo 1-fan, pseudo-2), by performing the pseudo-relation of Gase in advance, it is as if pseudo-relation (pseudo 1-fan, pseudo-2). There is a production (aura use production) that makes you look as if you have redone. The details of the aura use effect will be described later.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 1. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, miss).

The variation pattern table 1 for loss includes the main variation patterns PH1-1 (3 seconds), PH1-2 (7 seconds), PH1-3 (10 seconds), PH1-4 (18 seconds), and PH1-5 (30 seconds). Seconds), PH1-6 (50 seconds), PH1-7 (40 seconds), PH1-8 (38 seconds), PH1-9 (58 seconds), PH1-10 (48 seconds), PH1-11 (60 seconds) , PH1-12 (80 seconds), PH1-13 (70 seconds) are set. If the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "missing", one of the main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-13 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different main fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation time is relative without depending on the number of pending balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the second special symbol. The main fluctuation pattern PH1-1 or PH1-2 set to be short is selected. As a modification, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", only the main variation pattern of the shortened variation is selected or the shortened variation is selected regardless of the number of pending operations of the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the variation pattern can be selected most (preferably, the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol). Further, as a modification, the normal fluctuation may be divided into the normal fluctuation A (5 seconds) and the normal fluctuation B (7 seconds). In that case, for the first special symbol, the normal fluctuation B is selected when the hold is 0. The shortened variation and the normal variation A may not be selected with the rate set to 40% (the selectivity of PH1-4 to PH1-13 is the same as the selectivity in FIG. 10), in which case the pending 1-2 is set. When the normal fluctuation A is set to 40%, the shortened fluctuation and the normal fluctuation B are not selected (the selectivity of PH1-4 to PH1-13 is the same as the selectivity in FIG. 10), and when the hold 3 is set. It is desirable that the selectivity of the shortened variation is 40% and the normal variation A and the normal variation B are not selected (the selectivity of PH1-4 to PH1-13 is the same as the selectivity in FIG. 10). 2 For special symbols, it is desirable to select only the shortened variation or only the normal variation B in any of the reserved 0 to 3.

The fluctuation pattern table 1 for big hits includes the main fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (30 seconds), PA1-2 (50 seconds), PA1-3 (40 seconds), PA1-4 (38 seconds), and PA1-5 (58 seconds). Seconds), PA1-6 (48 seconds), PA1-7 (60 seconds), PA1-8 (80 seconds), PA1-9 (70 seconds), PA1-10 (110 seconds), PA1-11 (90 seconds) , PA1-12 (100 seconds), PA1-13 (120 seconds), PA1-14 (120 seconds) are set. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", one of the main fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-9 is selected regardless of the big hit type (specific big hit, normal big hit). To. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "big hit", as described in the column of "effect content" in the figure, any one of SP reach A to C in the variation display. The main fluctuation pattern that develops into is selected. Here, the basic fluctuation times of PA1-1 to PA1-9 are set to be the same as the basic fluctuation times of PH1-5 to PH1-13 in the variation pattern table 1 for deviation, but the effect of not appearing at the time of deviation at the time of big hit (eg). Assuming that the specifications are such that a ally character or a fellow character congratulates), the time obtained by adding 10 seconds to the basic fluctuation time of PH1-5 to PH1-13 in the variation pattern table 1 for loss is added to PA1-1. It may be the basic fluctuation time of ~ PA1-9, and in the case of a big hit with a reverse effect (a surprising effect that pretends to be off and then informs that it is actually a big hit), it is not 10 seconds. The time may be the sum of 15 seconds. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main fluctuation pattern PA1-10 is selected, and the big hit type is "specific big hit". For example, the main fluctuation patterns PA1-11 to PA1-14 are selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern that develops into battle reach in the fluctuation display is as described in the "Production content" column in the figure. Be selected. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit in the normal mode, it corresponds to switching the effect mode from the normal mode to the revenge mode (battle mode). The variation patterns PA1-110 to 1-14 selected when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol in the variation pattern table 1 (variation pattern table in the normal mode) is a big hit, and the variation pattern table 6 The same basic fluctuation time (same production content) as the fluctuation patterns PA6-1 to 6-5 selected when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol becomes a big hit in (variation pattern table of revenge mode). It is associated with. In this embodiment, the selection of the main fluctuation pattern (SP reach D: victory) that can be selected when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "big hit" and the big hit type is "specific big hit". Although the rates are set to the same probability (25%), different selection rates may be set for each of the production routes 2 to 5 of SP reach D (battle production).

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 2. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 2 is referred to in the fluctuation display after the 1st to 19th rotations, the 21st to 39th rotations, the 41st to 59th rotations, and the 61st rotation in the suppression chance mode. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, miss).

The main fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (1 second), PH2-2 (3 seconds), and PH2-3 (7 seconds) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 2 for deviation. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the main fluctuation pattern PH2-2 does not depend on the number of pending balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the second special symbol. Alternatively, PH2-3 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "missing", one of the main fluctuation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different main fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the easier it is to select the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively long. As a modification, for the first special symbol, only normal fluctuation may be selected (selection rate is 100%) at any time of hold 0 to 3, and for the second special symbol, it may be selected. When hold 0, select only normal fluctuation (selection rate is 100%), when hold 1-2, select only shortened variation (selection rate is 100%), and when hold 3, super Only the shortened variation may be selected (selection rate is 100%). In addition to the ultra-shortened fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, and normal fluctuation, the fluctuation (15 seconds) for fueling the development to SP reach D and performing a production that does not develop as a result is at least the fluctuation of the second special symbol. It may be provided, and the selection rate of the fanning fluctuation in that case is uniformly 10% in any of the cases of hold 0 to 3, and the other 90% is the same as the distribution rate of the selection rate in this figure. It may be (for example, when the hold is 0, the shortened variation is selected at 18% and the normal variation is selected at 72%), or it may be the same as the distribution ratio of the selectivity in the modified example (for example, hold). When it is 0, the normal fluctuation is 90%.) Further, these modifications may be applied to the variation pattern tables 5 and 6 for deviation, which will be described later.

The fluctuation pattern table 2 for big hits includes the main fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (110 seconds), PA2-2 (90 seconds), PA2-3 (100 seconds), PA2-4 (120 seconds), and PA2-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main variation pattern PA2-1 is selected if the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", and the main variation is if the jackpot type is "specific jackpot". One of the patterns PA2-2 to PA2-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit". , One of the main fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-5 is selected.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 3. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 3 is referred to in the fluctuation display of the 20th rotation, the 40th rotation, and the 60th rotation of the suppression chance mode (provided that the suppression chance mode continues only). The contents of the fluctuation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, miss).

The main variation pattern PH3-1 (30 seconds) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for deviation. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the main fluctuation pattern PH3-1 does not depend on the number of pending balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the first special symbol. Be selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the main fluctuation pattern PH3 does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). -
1 is selected. That is, in the variation display (branch game in the suppression chance mode) in which the variation pattern table 3 is referred to, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "missing", the "suppression chance" is reached. The variation pattern PH3-1 in which the "mode continuation effect" is performed is selected. In the "suppression chance mode continuation effect", the effect mode currently being executed (suppression chance mode) changes next time after the shutter effect (the door image changes from the open state to the closed state to the open state in almost the entire area of the screen). It is an effect to notify that it will continue even after the display. That is, the "suppression chance mode continuation effect" is an effect that encourages whether or not the fluctuation display is the final variation display of the suppression chance mode (high base state). The "suppression chance mode continuous effect" corresponds to the base branch effect (FIG. 56) described later.

The fluctuation pattern table 3 for big hits includes the main fluctuation patterns PA3-1 (110 seconds), PA3-2 (90 seconds), PA3-3 (100 seconds), PA3-4 (120 seconds), and PA3-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is selected if the big hit type is "normal big hit", and the main fluctuation pattern is selected if the big hit type is "specific big hit". One of PA3-2 to PA3-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main variation pattern PA3-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit". , One of the main fluctuation patterns PA3-2 to PA3-5 is selected. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 3 for big hits has substantially the same setting contents as the fluctuation pattern table 2 for big hits described above.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 4. The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 4. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 4 is referred to in the fluctuation display of the 20th rotation, the 40th rotation, and the 60th rotation of the suppression chance mode (provided only when the suppression chance mode ends). The contents of the fluctuation pattern table 4 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, miss).

The main variation pattern PH4-1 (30 seconds) is set in the variation pattern table 4 for deviation. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the main fluctuation pattern PH4-1 does not depend on the number of pending balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the first special symbol. Be selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the main fluctuation pattern PH4 does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). -1 is selected. That is, in the variation display (branch game in the suppression chance mode) in which the variation pattern table 4 is referred to, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "missing", the "suppression chance" is reached. The variation pattern PH4-1 in which the "mode end effect" is performed is selected. In the "suppression chance mode end effect", the effect mode (suppression chance mode) currently being executed is displayed as a variation after the shutter effect (the shutter image changes from the open state to the closed state to the open state in almost the entire screen). It is an effect to notify the end of the process. That is, the "suppression chance mode end effect" is an effect of inciting whether or not the fluctuation display is the final variation display of the suppression chance mode (high base state). The "suppression chance mode end effect" corresponds to the base branch effect (FIG. 56) described later.

The fluctuation pattern table 4 for big hits includes the main fluctuation patterns PA4-1 (110 seconds), PA4-2 (90 seconds), PA4-3 (100 seconds), PA4-4 (120 seconds), and PA4-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main fluctuation pattern PA4-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit", the main fluctuation One of the patterns PA4-2 to PA4-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main fluctuation pattern PA4-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit". , One of the main fluctuation patterns PA4-2 to PA4-5 is selected. That is, the fluctuation pattern table 4 for big hits has substantially the same setting contents as the fluctuation pattern tables 2 and 3 for big hits described above.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 5. The variation pattern table 5 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 5. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table 5 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, miss).

The main fluctuation patterns PH5-1 (1 second), PH5-2 (3 seconds), and PH5-3 (7 seconds) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 5 for deviation. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the main fluctuation pattern PH5-2 does not depend on the number of pending balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the first special symbol. Alternatively, PH5-3 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "missing", one of the main fluctuation patterns PH5-1 to PH5-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is increased. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select the main fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively long. It should be noted that the variation pattern table 5 for deviation has substantially the same setting contents as the variation pattern table 2 for deviation described above.

The fluctuation pattern table 5 for big hits includes the main fluctuation patterns PA5-1 (110 seconds), PA5-2 (90 seconds), PA5-3 (100 seconds), PA5-4 (120 seconds), and PA5-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main variation pattern PA5-1 is selected if the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", and the main variation if the jackpot type is "specific jackpot". One of the patterns PA5-2 to PA5-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main fluctuation pattern PA5-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit". , One of the main fluctuation patterns PA5-2 to PA5-5 is selected. The fluctuation pattern table 5 for big hits has substantially the same setting contents as the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table 2 for big hits.

(Variation pattern table 6)
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 6. The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state currently staying is the selection state 6. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table 6 are different depending on the result of the hit / fail determination (big hit, miss).

The main fluctuation patterns PH6-1 (1 second), PH6-2 (3 seconds), and PH6-3 (7 seconds) are set in the fluctuation pattern table 6 for deviation. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation pattern PH6-2 or PH6-3 is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "missing", one of the main fluctuation patterns PH6-1 to PH6-3 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is according to the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and different fluctuation patterns can be selected even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is increased. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively long. It should be noted that the variation pattern table 6 for deviation has substantially the same setting contents as the variation pattern tables 2 and 5 for deviation described above.

The fluctuation pattern table 6 for big hits includes the main fluctuation patterns PA6-1 (110 seconds), PA6-2 (90 seconds), PA6-3 (100 seconds), PA6-4 (120 seconds), and PA6-5 (120 seconds). Seconds) is set. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main variation pattern PA6-1 is selected if the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", and the main variation is if the jackpot type is "specific jackpot". One of the patterns PA6-2 to PA6-5 is selected. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is "normal big hit", the main fluctuation pattern PA6-1 is selected, and if the big hit type is "specific big hit". , One of the main fluctuation patterns PA6-2 to PA6-5 is selected. The fluctuation pattern table 6 for big hits has substantially the same setting contents as the fluctuation pattern tables 2 and 5 for big hits described above.

Here, in the present embodiment, the main fluctuation pattern of the battle reach (SP reach D) is set in all the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 6. "Battle reach" is an SP reach in which a battle effect is developed in which a ally character plays against an enemy character to decide the victory or defeat. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "missing", the main fluctuation pattern of the battle reach (SP reach D) is not selected, and the first special When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the symbol or the second special symbol is "big hit" (however, when the variation pattern table 1 is set, only when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit". ), The main fluctuation pattern of battle reach is selected. Therefore, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot was won at the time when the battle reach was developed (when the battle production was started) during the execution of the fluctuation display. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "big hit", if the big hit type is "specific big hit", the result of the battle effect is "win". Is selected, and if the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", the main fluctuation pattern in which the result of the battle effect is "defeat" is selected. Therefore, if the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle effect during the execution of the variable display, it is suggested to the player that the specific jackpot (the jackpot that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state) is won. On the other hand, if the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the battle effect during the execution of the fluctuation display, it is suggested to the player that the normal jackpot (the jackpot that triggers the fall to the normal gaming state) is won.

In this way, the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 6 specify the basic fluctuation time of the special symbol for each main fluctuation pattern, but regardless of which main fluctuation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol is specified. "0.5 seconds" is set for (confirmed display time). The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time when the special symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In this embodiment, the variation time (basic variation time, variation addition time) and the confirmation stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the variation time (basic variation time, variation addition time) and the fixed stop time of the special symbol. Has been done.

Further, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects a plurality of types of the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern (main variation pattern) and then refers to the main variation addition table associated with the selected main variation pattern. Select one main variation addition pattern from the main variation addition patterns of. This main fluctuation addition pattern specifies an additional fluctuation time (variation addition time) to be added to the basic fluctuation time. In the present embodiment, as described above, the total time obtained by adding the "variation addition time" to the "basic fluctuation time" is defined as the fluctuation time of the special symbol (variation time = basic fluctuation time + fluctuation addition time). As a result, while suppressing the storage capacity of the main control board 100 related to the main fluctuation pattern by suppressing the number of main fluctuation patterns, by combining a plurality of types of main fluctuation addition patterns for one main fluctuation pattern, it is practically possible. It is possible to create a large number of main fluctuation patterns according to the number of combinations. In the present embodiment, the variable addition time is used as an effect scale (overall scale) for a special effect described later. The detailed contents of this main fluctuation addition pattern will be described later.

Since the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol after selecting the variation pattern and the variation addition pattern of the special symbol, the communication with the effect control board 200 is normal. Production control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not it is performed, production control command (variation addition information specification command) including main fluctuation addition pattern (information for adding / subtracting fluctuation time), main fluctuation pattern Generate production control commands (variable pattern specification commands) that include information, effect control commands (symbol specification commands) that include information on character production numbers (symbols and game states), etc. (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as ". (Referred to as "variation start command"), which is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol winning / failing determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. When the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol per normal symbol value and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the normal symbol hit / miss determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "conditions for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol" are (1) waiting for the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and (2) the existence of an operation holding ball of the normal symbol. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which fluctuation start is possible (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146 reads a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol, and the determination result is either "hit" or "missing". Determine if it applies to. The result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The ordinary symbol winning / failing determination means 146 holds a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table (not shown) that is referred to when determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is activated. If so, it is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and if the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is a hit, the predetermined hit symbol (an opportunity for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate). On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is out of order, a predetermined out-of-order symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, the symbol A and the symbol B are assigned as the winning symbols of the ordinary symbol, while the symbol C is assigned as the outlier symbol of the ordinary symbol.

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determining means 148 reads the ordinary symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and also refers to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to refer to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table. Determine (variation time). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). Is set to "0.2 seconds" when is operating. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In the control of the normal symbol, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, when the electric chew support function is not operating, the hit probability of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to "0" and the normal symbol is set. It is also conceivable to adopt a specification in which the fluctuation time of is single.

Further, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 holds an ordinary electric accessory opening pattern table that is referred to when determining an opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is set. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 may be different depending on the type of the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol. For example, when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, if the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol is symbol A, "3 seconds opening x 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds) ", and if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is symbol B," 2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5) .8 seconds) ".

When the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, and the round game, according to the determined big hit type (symbol group). Determine the execution time (round time). Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute an effect control command (referred to as a “big hit start demo command”) for instructing the execution of the jackpot start demo effect and execution of the jackpot end demo effect. An effect control command (referred to as a "big hit end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command is also an opportunity for the effect control board 200 to determine the content of a series of jackpot medium effects (big hit start demo effect, round effect, big hit end demo effect) developed during the big hit game. Become. Further, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. , This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds and information on opening and closing of the grand prize opening 54. Regarding the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, not only the big hit type (symbol group) but also the same big hit type (symbol group) according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. However, the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo may be different.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the fluctuation display. Let me. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 72 to variably display the second special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). Generates an effect control command (referred to as a "fluctuation stop command"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 75 to variably display the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and confirms and displays the normal symbol after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

Further, the special symbol display control means 156 issues an effect control command (referred to as "standby demo command") that triggers the execution of the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that the period in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist and the change display of the special symbol is not performed continues for a predetermined time or longer. If the period in which the game ball is not fired continues for a predetermined time or longer, or if the period in which the game ball has not entered all the winning openings continues for a predetermined time or longer, the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It may be a continuous specification.

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after confirming the special symbol, and outputs the control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543. The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a large winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, the operation end condition (end condition of the unit game) of the special electric accessory 542 in the big hit game is that a game ball having a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) enters the big winning opening 54. That is, or the opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“28 seconds”, “2 seconds” in this embodiment).

Further, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 when the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, and the ordinary electric accessory 522 (the first) for a predetermined opening time. 2 The opening / closing control of the starting port 52) is performed. Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. Then, in the high base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number of game balls (“10” in this embodiment) have entered the second starting port 52, or that the second starting port 52 has a predetermined number of game balls. The total opening time has reached the opening limit time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the game state control means 165 refers to the above-mentioned game state setting table, the type of the symbol related to the big hit, and the time when the big hit is won. Based on the game state of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is determined, and the game state after the end of the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of gaming states, a normal gaming state (low probability low base state), a time-saving gaming state (low probability low base state), and a latent gaming state (high probability low base state). , Probability variation game state (high probability high base state) is set, and one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set with reference to the above game state setting table. Since the game state setting table has already been described, duplicate explanations will be omitted here.

Further, when the jackpot game is executed, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (symbol group), and also determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the jackpot game. Switch the pattern selection state. In the present embodiment, the selected state 1, the selected state 2, the selected state 3, the selected state 4, the selected state 5, and the selected state 6 are set as the plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. One of a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern selection states is selectively set according to the jackpot type, the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol, and the like. Since the fluctuation pattern selection state has already been described, duplicate explanation will be omitted here.

The game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, and the like. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to indicate the effect state effect to the effect control board 200. Although the description is omitted in FIGS. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming behavior.

The main information storage means 180 has random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and a game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game. Information on shortening function, electric chew support function), information on variable pattern selection status, result information of hit / fail judgment of special symbols and ordinary symbols (big hit, miss), stop symbols related to special symbols and ordinary symbols (including symbol group) Information, information on variation patterns (including variation addition patterns) of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on jackpot games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of openings per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, It is configured to temporarily store status information indicating the operating state of 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, information of effect control command data, and the like, and a predetermined storage for storing each information. It has an area.

The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE data is "1". Bit7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When transmitting such information as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the staging control board 200 includes a staging lottery random number generation means 210, a staging control means 220, a lamp control means 230, a character control means 240, an error staging control means 250, a sub-main information storage means 260, and a command. Includes transmission / reception means 270. In addition, each means described above in the staging control board 200 is a sub-main CPU 20 arranged on the staging control board 200.
1. It is a functional representation of what is composed of hardware such as ROM 202, RAM 203, and electronic circuits, and software such as a control program stored in ROM 202.

The effect lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as a random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include a look-ahead lottery random number used for the lottery of the look-ahead effect, a decorative symbol random number used for the lottery of the decorative symbol stop symbol, and a decorative symbol variation pattern random number used for the lottery of the decorative symbol variation pattern (sub-variation pattern). Random number), decorative pattern variation addition pattern random number used for lottery of decorative pattern variation addition pattern (sub-variation addition pattern random number), notice lottery random number used for advance notice effect lottery, jackpot effect pattern used for big hit effect pattern lottery Random numbers, stage lottery random numbers used for the transition lottery of the production stage, etc. are included. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the main process on the effect control side (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100), which will be described later. do.

The staging control means 220 includes a staging mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a look-ahead notice control means 223, a variable staging control means 224, a decorative symbol control means 225, a notice staging control means 226, and a special game staging control means 227. include.

The effect mode control means 221 is based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, and is consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Also called "directing mode"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, "normal mode", "suppression chance mode", "special mode", "phantom fight rush mode", and "revenge mode" are set as a plurality of types of production modes. Therefore, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) managed on the main control board 100 side, the variation display number of the special symbol, and the like. A variable effect corresponding to the set effect mode is executed. When any of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the person is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) Is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. The detailed contents of the production mode (game flow) will be described later.

The hold information display control means 222 has a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation hold balls included in this command. On the other hand, the hold information display control means 222 updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter when the change start command from the main control board 100 is received, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested. Further, the hold information display control means 222 displays the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol on the hold image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol. Further, the hold information display control means 222 switches to the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball when the operation hold ball (the earliest operation hold ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is digested. Controls the display of the displayed changing image. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are not distinguished and are simply referred to as a "pending image", and are referred to as a changing image of the first special symbol. It may be simply referred to as a "changing image" without distinguishing it from the changing image of the second special symbol.

The look-ahead notice control means 223 executes a look-ahead determination (referred to as “look-ahead lottery”) for the operation holding ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous advance notice effect that announces the possibility of a big hit winning or a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect) over one or more variable displays before the operation hold ball to be read ahead is digested. It occurs as one aspect. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the pre-reading advance notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, respectively. Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the entry order of the operation holding balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100, and holds 1 storage area (first hold storage area) in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52. A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided, respectively. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of pre-determination of hit / fail, information on the result of pre-determination of symbols, and information on the result of pre-determination of fluctuation pattern as a set. The information of the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 It is digested in the order of storage area (principle of first-in first-out). Further, when the information of the preliminary determination result of the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary determination result stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is stored in the storage area of the lower number, respectively. At the same time as shifting, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

The variation effect control means 224 is based on the information (main variation pattern, main variation addition pattern, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, and the variation process (effect) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. A variation effect pattern (also referred to as a "sub-variation pattern") that defines a process) is determined. The variation effect control means 224 holds a sub-variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a sub-variation pattern (variation effect pattern), and refers to this sub-variation pattern table for a plurality of types of sub-variation patterns. From among, one sub-variation pattern corresponding to the main fluctuation pattern (basic fluctuation time) or a combination of the main fluctuation pattern (basic fluctuation time) and the main fluctuation addition pattern (variation addition time) is selected by lottery. (In this embodiment, the selection corresponds to the combination, but it may depend only on the main fluctuation pattern). Here, while the main fluctuation pattern of the symbol variation is determined on the main control board 100 side, the sub-variation of the symbol variation that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail based on the main variation pattern on the effect control board 200 side. The pattern is decided. This sub-variation pattern defines a variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation, and the advance notice effect is given at each stage in the display process. The timing of occurrence is also defined as a time schedule. Further, the variation effect control means 224 determines the sub-variation addition pattern, and then determines the sub-variation addition pattern corresponding to the main variation addition pattern. The details of the sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern will be described later.

Further, the variation effect control means 224 receives the standby demo command from the main control board 100, and receives the standby demo command until the variation display of the special symbol is started (the next variation start). During the customer waiting period (until the command is received), for example, a standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) for playing a moving image for demonstration is executed. However, in the present embodiment, the standby demo effect is executed only when the effect mode is the normal mode. The details of the standby demo production will be described later.

The decorative symbol control means 225 is decorated based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the above variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of stopped symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by, for example, identification elements composed of numbers and the like. Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for loss of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a missed symbol (missing symbol)". The jackpot symbol indicating the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three symbols having the same odd number are arranged. The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2.2.2") in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned. As a modification, if the jackpot symbol is a jackpot that triggers the transition to the phantom fight rush mode, the jackpot symbol when the jackpot is drawn in the normal mode (special mode) has three identical odd-numbered symbols. If it is a combination of stop modes and a big hit that triggers the transition to the suppression chance mode, it is desirable to have a combination of stop modes in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned. The reason is that the suppression chance mode is a production mode that conceals whether the currently executing game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state, so as in the above principle, a big hit in the variable display in the normal mode (special mode). When a normal jackpot occurs, a jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (a combination of stop modes in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned) or a jackpot symbol indicating a specific jackpot (a stop in which three identical odd-numbered symbols are aligned) This is because if the combination of modes) is stopped and displayed, the gaming state after the transition (before shifting to the suppression chance mode) is exposed to the player. In addition, as another variation example, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of SP reach D in the battle mode (phantom fight rush mode, suppression chance mode, revenge mode) described later, the result of the battle production is victory. If the jackpot type suggested in is "16R specific jackpot", it becomes a combination of stop modes in which three identical odd-numbered or even-numbered symbols are aligned (that is, doublet symbol combination) (then, "7. Once a combination of doublet symbols other than "7.7" is displayed (temporarily stopped), it may be changed to "7.7 / 7" and then stopped), and the battle effect If the jackpot type suggested by the result of being defeated is "2R normal jackpot", the left and right symbols such as "2.1.2" and "6/5/6" match. It is desirable to have a combination of reach-off modes in which only the middle symbol is different (for the purpose of seeing, it is the same as the "reach-off symbol" described later). However, regarding the battle mode (phantom battle rush mode, suppression chance mode, revenge mode) in this modified example, "7, 6, 7" will not be stopped (in other words, it will reach "7". In that case, it is always desirable to be "7, 7, 7"). The out-of-order symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "1 ・ 3 ・ 8") in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol with a number different from the other numbers. Here, among the out-of-reach symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "3, 1, 3") in which only the middle symbol is displaced back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, it may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7". In addition, when the lottery result is out of reach, a specific result called a so-called "chance eye" (for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" or "5, 6 ・ 7" as the order), etc. "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the deviation. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, when a temporary stop display and a re-variable display are performed before the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, a special symbol (a special stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) is used. Pseudo-ream pattern) is selected. When displaying a temporary stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-ream, display a character such as "NEXT" for at least one stop symbol (typically a middle symbol) among the stop symbols of the three rows of decorative symbols. There are cases where the characters are replaced with special symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols) and displayed (for example, "2.NEXT.3", "2.NEXT.2", etc.). The stop order for stopping the decorative symbol is predetermined for each of the following variable effect patterns, and in principle, the left symbol → the right symbol → the middle symbol are stopped in this embodiment. However, in the case of the variation effect pattern of the shortened variation in which the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol can be stopped almost at the same time. Further, in the case of a special variation effect pattern, the right symbol → the middle symbol → the left symbol can be stopped in this order, and in this case, the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, regardless of the stop order, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol start the fluctuation at the same time when the fluctuation starts. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and in that case, the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high.

The advance notice effect control means 226 draws a lottery for the advance notice effect pattern that defines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by. The advance notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, or the like temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol, and suggests that the symbol variation has a high jackpot reliability in which the symbol variation is stopped in the jackpot mode. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including the time when the reach occurs) in the process of displaying the variation of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each notice effect has a different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher expectation of the jackpot than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The advance notice effect control means 226 holds the advance notice lottery table referred to when selecting the advance notice effect pattern for each type of advance notice effect, and the advance notice according to the type of the advance notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. The lottery table is selected. As specific types of notice production, for example, comment notice production, background notice production, SU (step-up) notice production, logo notice production, mini character notice production, group notice production, character notice production, etc. are prepared. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing the display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is varied and displayed by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the content (big hit effect pattern) of the big hit medium effect that notifies that the big hit game is in progress. The big hit middle effect includes a start demo effect that notifies the start of the big hit game, a round effect that notifies that the round game is in progress, and an end demo effect that notifies the end of the big hit game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the big hit start demo command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227 is based on the information of the big hit type stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, and the big hit medium effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, Determine the round production pattern and the end demo production pattern). In this jackpot effect pattern, a start demo effect time, a round effect time (effect time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening 54), and an end demo effect time are set, and a series along the time axis. The production content of is set. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the start demo effect when the jackpot start demo command is received from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and each receives the round effect designation command. The round effect is executed, and the end demo effect is executed when the jackpot end demo command is received. In the jackpot start demo production, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the big hit game are displayed. Then, in the big hit end demo production, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen to notify the end of the big hit game. Here, depending on whether the game state when the result of the hit / fail determination relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit is a high base state or a low base state, the big hit start demo time or the big hit The time and content of the start demo effect may be different, and the time and content of the big hit end demo and the big hit end demo effect may be different. Further, an effect (for example, " You may generate the production A) that the ally character encourages during the big hit end demo, instead, the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol becomes the big hit. A production that occurs when the game state is high base state and does not occur when the game state is low base state (for example, production B where the enemy character encourages "It will continue!") Occurs during the jackpot end demo You may let me. Further, another effect (eg) that occurs when the gaming state when the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit is in the high base state and does not occur when the game state is in the low base state (eg). As a result, the effect C) in which the characters "big hit +1 times!" Appear may be generated. In this case, the effect C can be generated if there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold (up to 4 hold) related to the second special symbol scheduled to be digested after the big hit end demo is finished. It is desirable that the effect B can be generated without requiring such a condition. However, although it is not essential, it is desirable that both the effect B and the effect C occur only during the big hit end demonstration of the special game related to the probabilistic big hit.

As described above, the staging control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined staging contents (look-ahead staging pattern, variable staging pattern, notice staging pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot staging pattern, etc.). This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. Is read out, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

The accessory control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. ..

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative symbol information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and is predetermined for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. Contains an ACK command buffer to store ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100, executes reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the effect control command, and issues various effect control commands in this interrupt process. It is supposed to get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command with priority over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing of priority level 7 or less described later). ing.

Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to indicate the execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by the serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variablely display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. , The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of this embodiment will be described. As described above, FIG. 7 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a normal mode, a suppression chance mode, a special mode, a phantom fight rush mode, and a revenge mode are set as a plurality of types of production modes.

<Normal mode>
First, in the pachinko gaming machine PM when the power is turned on, the effect mode is set to the normal mode, and the game is started from this normal mode. The normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to a normal gaming state (low probability low base state). When the effect mode is the normal mode, the frequency of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51 is set higher than the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the player hits left ( (By launching the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 51, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is independently executed. It becomes playful. In this normal mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is 5% and "4R specific jackpot 2 (4R specific jackpot 2)" as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. "Design group B)" is 10%, "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is 20%, "4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)" is 20%, and "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)". 10%, "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" 14%, "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" 14%, "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)" 7% Occurs with probability. If the jackpot type is one of "4R specific jackpot 1 to 4 (symbol group A to D)" and "4R normal jackpot 1 to 3 (symbol group F to H)", after the end of the jackpot game, " Move to "Suppression Chance Mode". On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)", the mode shifts to the phantom fight rush mode after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn in this normal mode, there is a 90% chance of shifting to the "suppression chance mode" and a 10% chance of shifting to the "phantom fight rush mode".

<Suppression chance mode>
The suppression chance mode is an effect mode corresponding to a time-saving game state (low probability high base state) or a probabilistic game state (high probability high base state), that is, an effect mode corresponding to a high base state in which the electric chew support function is activated. be. When the staging mode shifts to the suppression chance mode, the electric chew support function is activated, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. By firing), the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. In this suppression chance mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, "16R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group I)" is 32.5% and "16R specific" as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. "Big hit 2 (symbol group J)" occurs with a probability of 32.5%, and "2R normal big hit (symbol group K)" occurs with a probability of 35%. If the jackpot type is one of "16R specific jackpot 1-2 (symbol group I, J)", the mode shifts to the "phantom fight rush mode" after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)", the mode shifts to the "revenge mode" after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn in this suppression chance mode, there is a 65% chance of shifting to the "phantom fight rush mode" and a 35% chance of shifting to the "revenge mode".

In addition, the suppression chance mode is continued from the end of the big hit game until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times. The maximum number of times of the suppression chance mode is the same as the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time and the number of electric support described above, and the jackpot type of the first special symbol (the jackpot type of the first special symbol that triggered the transition to the suppression chance mode). ), The upper limit number of times (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 10000 times) is set. Specifically, the upper limit of the suppression chance mode is such that the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the suppression chance mode is "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" or "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)". If there is, "20 times" is set, and if it is "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" or "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)", "40 times" is set and "4R specific jackpot 2" is set. "60 times" is set in the case of "3 (symbol group C)" or "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)", and "10000 times" in the case of "4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)". Is set. Then, in this suppression chance mode, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the above upper limit number (20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 10000 times) without the next big hit, this suppression chance The mode will end and the mode will shift to the special mode.

<Special mode>
The special mode is an effect mode corresponding to a normal game state (low probability low base state) or a latent game state (high probability low base state), that is, an effect corresponding to a low base state in which the electric chew support function is not activated. The mode. As described above, this special mode is set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit in the suppression chance mode (set after exiting the electric support state). When the effect mode is the special mode, the frequency of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51 is set higher than the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52, so that the player hits left ( (By launching the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is made to enter the first starting port 51, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is independently executed. It becomes playful. In this special mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is 5% and "4R specific jackpot 2 (4R specific jackpot 2)" as the jackpot type of the first special symbol. "Design group B)" is 10%, "4R specific jackpot 3 (symbol group C)" is 20%, "4R specific jackpot 4 (symbol group D)" is 20%, and "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)". 10%, "4R normal jackpot 1 (symbol group F)" 14%, "4R normal jackpot 2 (symbol group G)" 14%, "4R normal jackpot 3 (symbol group H)" 7% Occurs with probability. In the special mode, the game state set after the end of the big hit game may differ depending on the game state (normal game state, latent game state) at the time of winning the big hit. That is, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "4R specific jackpot 1 to 4 (symbol group A to D)" and "4R normal jackpot 1 to 3 (symbol). If it is one of "Groups F to H)", "Suppression chance mode" after the big hit game is over.
If the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "4R specific jackpot 5 (symbol group E)", the mode shifts to "phantom fight rush mode" after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent gaming state, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "4R specific jackpot 1 to 3 (symbol group A to C)" and "4R normal jackpot 1 to 3 (4R normal jackpot 1 to 3). If it is one of the "symbol group F to H)", it shifts to the "suppression chance mode" after the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "4R specific jackpot 4, 5 (symbol group D, If it is "E)", the mode shifts to the "phantom fight rush mode" after the jackpot game is completed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, since the number of subsequent high base states (number of times of shortening the fluctuation time) differs depending on the game state when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, " Even if the symbols that trigger the transition to the "suppression chance mode" are the same (in particular, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "4R specific jackpot 1 to 3 (symbol group A to C)"), that mode The number of stays in the game varies depending on the game state when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit.

If the gaming state in the special mode is the normal gaming state and the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches 10 without the next big hit, the mode shifts from the next variable display to the normal mode. .. On the other hand, when the gaming state in the special mode is the latent gaming state, even when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 10 times without the next big hit, it is normal from the next fluctuation display. It does not shift to the mode and stays in the special mode until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, the current gaming state is concealed from immediately after the transition to the special mode until the variation display of 10 rotations is completed. Further, in the present embodiment, during the 10-rotation variation display immediately after the transition to the latent mode, the remaining number notification effect for notifying the remaining number of times until the 10-rotation variation display ends and the 10-rotation variation display are performed. After the end of, a mode branching effect suggesting whether the special mode continues or ends is executed. The details of the remaining number notification effect and the mode branch effect will be described later.

<Phantom fight rush mode>
The phantom fight rush mode is a staging mode corresponding to a probabilistic game state (high probability and high base state). When the staging mode shifts to the phantom fight rush mode, the electric chew support function is activated, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. (By firing), the game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52, and the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed.
In this phantom fight rush mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, "16R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group I)" is 32.5% and "16R" as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. "Specific jackpot 2 (symbol group J)" has a probability of 32.5%, and "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)" has a probability of 35%. If the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any of "16 specific jackpots 1 and 2 (symbol group I, J)", the mode shifts to the "phantom fight rush mode" again after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)", the player falls into the "revenge mode" after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, this phantom fight rush mode continues until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches "1000 times" (that is, until the next big hit occurs substantially).

<Revenge mode>
The revenge mode is an effect mode corresponding to a time-saving game state (low probability and high base state). When the staging mode shifts to the revenge mode, the electric chew support function is activated, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. By letting the game ball enter the second starting port 52, the game becomes playable in which the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol) is independently executed. In this revenge mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, "16R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group I)" is 32.5% and "16R specific jackpot" as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. 2 (symbol group J) "occurs with a probability of 32.5%, and" 2R normal jackpot (symbol group K) "occurs with a probability of 35%. If the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any of "16 specific jackpots 1 and 2 (symbol group I, J)", the mode shifts to the phantom fight rush mode after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "2R normal jackpot (symbol group K)", the mode shifts to the revenge mode again after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, this revenge mode continues until the number of times of variation display of a special symbol reaches "100 times". Therefore, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times without the next big hit in the revenge mode, this revenge mode ends and the mode shifts from the next fluctuation display to the normal mode.

≪Battle mode≫
In the present embodiment, of the plurality of types of effect modes, the effect mode in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game is configured as a battle mode in which a battle effect in which a ally character plays against an enemy character is developed. There is. That is, when the effect mode is the battle mode, when the variable display develops into SP reach, a battle effect in which the ally character plays against the enemy character and decides the victory or defeat is developed. In this embodiment, "suppression chance mode", "phantom fight rush mode", and "revenge mode" correspond to battle modes. In this battle mode, the big hit winning is confirmed when the SP reach is developed (when the battle production is started). Then, the type of jackpot is suggested or notified according to the effect result (win or lose of the battle) of the battle effect. In other words, as a result of the battle effect, when the ally character wins the enemy character, a specific jackpot ("4R specific jackpot" in the variable display of the first special symbol, "16R specific jackpot" in the variable display of the second special symbol) is confirmed. However, when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, the normal jackpot (“4R normal jackpot” in the variable display of the first special symbol, “2R normal jackpot” in the variable display of the second special symbol) is confirmed. The details of the battle production will be described later.

<< Anomalous transition when an accident occurs in normal mode (1) >>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode and a predetermined special transition condition is satisfied, the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the revenge mode. The "special transition condition" is that the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol (in the normal mode) is a big hit (a so-called accident hit occurs). That is, when the effect mode is the normal mode (including the normal mode immediately after the power is turned on), the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) should be the main body of the game. However, in spite of the low base state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol becomes a big hit (so-called accident hit), or the high base state is low. Immediately before shifting to the base state, one or more holds related to the second special symbol remain, and as a result of the hold being exhausted in the low base state, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit (also the event is If the second special symbol is a big hit type of "16R specific big hit 1", "16R specific big hit 2", or "2R normal big hit", the second is the same. At the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the effect mode is shifted from the normal mode to the revenge mode, and the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of the jackpot) is executed in this revenge mode.

To outline the reason, first, in the variable effect of the big hit in the normal mode, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol which is the main body of the game in the normal mode is the big hit, and when the big hit type is won. Even so, it is designed on the assumption that a predetermined number of prize balls (4 rounds x 10 counts x 15 = 600) can be obtained in the jackpot game. On the other hand, when a big hit of the second special symbol occurs in the normal mode, if the big hit type is 2R normal big hit, the expected value of winning a prize ball in the big hit game is practically 0 (or some prize balls are obtained). There may be an expected value, but 2 rounds x 10 counts x 15 = 300 is an expected value that can not be expected at least), and the content of the jackpot fluctuation effect in the normal mode (for example, the result of the SP reach effect) If the actual game result is a 2R normal jackpot (0 prize balls), even though there is a production content that informs you that there is an opportunity to win a prize ball due to the success production. There may be a discrepancy between the content and the game result (profit mode), which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable or distrustful. In other words, the jackpot type of the second special symbol (16R specific jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) was originally designed assuming a variable effect based on the battle specs, and as a result of the variable effect in the revenge mode. It is suitable to use. Therefore, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn when the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode, the effect mode is changed to the normal mode at the start of the variable display of the jackpot of the second special symbol. It is designed to shift from to revenge mode (battle mode).

However, although the staging mode shifts to the revenge mode (the staging mode corresponding to the time-saving game state), the game state is internally the normal game state, and the variable pattern selection state is the selection corresponding to the time-saving game state. The selection state 1 corresponding to the normal gaming state is maintained instead of the state 6. Therefore, in order to execute the variation effect (battle spec) in the revenge mode under the variation pattern (variation time) selected in this selection state 1, the variation at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in this selection state 1 The pattern selection tendency is set to be the same as the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in the selection state 6 (revenge mode). That is, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol in the selection state 1 is constructed on the premise that the fluctuation display is performed in the revenge mode instead of the normal mode as the effect mode. Therefore, when a big hit of the second special symbol occurs in the normal mode, even if the effect mode is irregularly changed from the normal mode to the revenge mode, a discrepancy or a contradiction occurs between the effect content and the game result. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the game production without causing the player to feel discomfort or distrust before and after the transition of the production mode.

<< Anomalous transition when an accident occurs in normal mode (2) >>
In the present embodiment, the number of times the revenge mode is continued is set to "100 times" as the number of times the special symbol is changed, and the number of times the special symbol is changed is displayed without the next big hit occurring during the execution of the revenge mode. When "100 times" is reached, the effect mode falls from the revenge mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode falls to the normal mode, this normal mode is an effect mode set when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), so that the first special symbol is originally correct or not. Judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) should be the main body of the game, but immediately after falling from the revenge mode to the normal mode, the second special symbol that occurred during the execution of the revenge mode (time saving game state) There is a high possibility that the operation-reserved ball remains, and the operation-reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation-reserved ball of the first special symbol. It can be said that it is easy to display the fluctuation of the design). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode (that is, when the above special transition condition is satisfied). In), as described above, the revenge mode is continued as it is without switching the effect mode from the revenge mode to the normal mode (without ending the revenge mode) at the start of the variation display. That is, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches "100 times" in the revenge mode, it normally falls to the normal mode, but the fluctuation display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode is the second special symbol. When the big hit is drawn, the revenge mode is continued as it is, and the big hit of the second special symbol is generated in the revenge mode of the 101st rotation. As a result, the revenge mode can be continued beyond the original upper limit number of times (100 times), and despite the fact that it is a big hit that occurred after falling into the normal gaming state internally, it is a pseudo time-saving gaming state. It can be made to appear as if a big hit has occurred while the villa is continuing (it is assumed that the state of consecutive villas has continued). Here, when the variation display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode is the variation display of the first special symbol, the player falls to the normal mode regardless of whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit.

≪Renso information≫
The RAM 203 of the staging control board 200 stores predetermined consecutive villa information as staging information to be notified about the current game situation and staging state. The consecutive villa information is basically the staging information set corresponding to the consecutive villa state of the big hit. This information on the consecutive villas will be useful judgment material for the player to know the current game situation and the staging state. Here, the continuous villa state is a game state during the non-special game state, and after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state, the specific game does not return to the non-specific game state. It refers to a state in which the state is continuous (a state in which big hits are continuously generated in a specific game state). In addition, the specific game state is a game state in which the probability of transition to the special game is higher than that of the normal game state. In a broad sense, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol, and the electric chew support It is a gaming state in which any one of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific gaming state means at least a gaming state in which the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game.

The consecutive villa information corresponds to "selected character information", "acquired ball number information", "continuous villa number information", "special movie information", "special production information", "music release information" and the like. The "selected character information" is information on a character (ally character) selected by the player before or at the start of the consecutive villa as a character appearing in various effects during the consecutive villa state. "Acquired ball number information" is information on the number of prize balls (cumulative number) acquired during the consecutive villa state. The "number of consecutive villas information" is information on the number of consecutive big hits during the consecutive villa state (the number of times the big hits that trigger the transition to the specific gaming state occur consecutively). The "special effect 1 information" is information on the number of consecutive big hits in the consecutive villas that triggers the execution of the special effect 1. The special effect 1 is when the player wins the battle effect a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) with the same character selected by the player during the consecutive villa state (however, 16R specific jackpot is used as the jackpot type of the second special symbol). A story effect (special movie) related to the character, which is executed under (condition). The "special effect 2 information" is information on the number of consecutive big hits in the consecutive villas that triggers the execution of the special effect 2. The special effect 2 is executed when the battle effect is won a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) during the consecutive villa state (however, 16R specific jackpot is a condition as the jackpot type of the second special symbol). It is a production that displays the highly rare premier characters one by one in order. The special effect 2 is an immutable effect that does not depend on the character, whereas the special effect 1 is a character-specific effect that depends on the character selected by the player. "Music release information" is information on the number of consecutive big hits in a consecutive villa that triggers the release of a new song. In this embodiment, when each new song is released one by one every time the battle effect is won a specified number of times (for example, once) (provided that the jackpot type of the second special symbol is 16R jackpot), In addition to the fixed music (for example, 3 music) that can be selected from the first hit, the player can select this newly released music. Here, the player may not be able to select this music, and it may be output according to the state of the consecutive villas (that is, if the music opening condition is satisfied, the released music is automatically performed when the music opening condition is satisfied. May be output to).

In the present embodiment, the consecutive villa information (number of consecutive villas) is updated according to the effect mode information (background information, effect stage information) currently being executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the staging mode is updated by updating the consecutive villa information until the staging mode falls to the normal mode (until the staging mode exits the phantom fight rush mode, the revenge mode, the suppression chance mode, and the special mode). Clear (reset) the consecutive villa information when falling to the normal mode (except for the special mode, the specification to update the consecutive villa information until the production mode exits the phantom fight rush mode, revenge mode, suppression chance mode May be). And, as an exception, when the big hit of the second special symbol is drawn in the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode, the game state actually falls to the normal game state (the consecutive villa state ends). However, the staging mode does not fall to the normal mode and continues the revenge mode, and the consecutive villa information is not cleared, the consecutive villa information is maintained as it is, and the appearance of the consecutive villa state is simulated. It shall be continued. By managing various types of consecutive villa information based on the effect mode information instead of the game state information, a discrepancy occurs between the effect mode (background screen) and the consecutive villa information, and the player feels uncomfortable or distrustful. It prevents the situation that makes you embrace.

At this time, when the consecutive villa state ends based on the fact that the revenge mode ends (the game state falls to the normal state), the external information terminal board 600 is outside the machine when the revenge mode ends. As an external information signal to be output to an external device (data display, hall computer), the signal during the consecutive villas is no longer output (off output). Therefore, even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn in the fluctuation display of the first rotation immediately after the end of the revenge mode, the continuous output from the external information terminal board 600 that has been continuously output until the end of the revenge mode is once sent. It will be interrupted (it will be turned off once), and then the output will be started again with the big hit. The signal during the consecutive villas is a signal indicating that the state is in the consecutive villas as the word implies, and more specifically, the result of the pass / fail judgment relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the low base state is a big hit. As a result, the output is started when the special game is executed, and the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a big hit in the high base state and the high base state that shifts thereafter. It is a signal that is continuously output during the execution of the special game executed by the above, and is a signal that ends the output when the game state during the non-special game shifts to the low base state.

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PM having such a configuration is configured so that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game and the like. .. In the following, among various game effects, "special effect", "hold change effect", "battle effect", "meter effect", "base suppression effect", "remaining number of times notification effect", "mode branch effect" The contents will be explained.

[Special production]
The special effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the special effect. The special effect is configured as a pre-effect before the pseudo variation (pseudo 2 variation, pseudo 3 variation) is performed during the execution of the variation display when the effect mode is the normal mode (including the special mode). .. The elemental effects that make up this special effect can be broadly divided into "companion participation effect", "aura use effect", and "aura connection effect". Therefore, the special effect is composed of a combination of such one or a plurality of types of element effects. Here, the types of companion participation productions are roughly classified into "companion one-person participation production" in which one companion character participates and "companion two-person participation production" in which two companion characters participate at the same time. The types of aura-connected effects are roughly divided into "Musou-connected effects" in which the auras of two fellow characters are connected and "Ultimate connected effects" in which the auras of three fellow characters are connected. The types of aura use effects are roughly divided into "normal aura use effects" that use the aura of fellow characters to perform normal attacks and "special aura use effects" that use the auras of fellow characters to perform special attacks. To. The detailed contents of each element production will be described later.

<Additional fluctuation information>
The special effect is an effect executed based on the variable addition information (sub-expanded variable addition information) specified by the sub-variable addition pattern. In the present embodiment, the basic pattern of the special effect is specified by the main variation addition pattern, and the detailed pattern of the special effect is specified by the sub variation addition pattern. That is, the main variation addition pattern is a basic pattern of the special effect that defines a scenario including the number of executions of each element effect, the execution order, and the like as a rough flow of the special effect. The sub-variation addition pattern is a detailed pattern of a special effect that defines a scenario of each element effect including the execution timing of each element effect based on the number of executions, the execution order, etc. of each element effect specified by the main variation addition pattern. Will be.

In the present embodiment, the basic pattern and the detailed pattern of the special effect are divided into four layers and drawn in order. That is, in the present embodiment, as four hierarchical structures, the first layer (main variation pattern) → the second layer (main variation addition pattern) → the third layer (sub variation pattern) → the fourth layer (sub variation addition pattern). By executing the effect lottery in the order of, the basic pattern and the detailed pattern of the special effect are determined. The first layer and the second layer are drawn by the main control board 100, and the third and fourth layers are drawn by the staging control board. Here, since the main variation pattern (first layer) has already been described in detail, in the following, the main variation addition pattern (second layer), the sub-variation pattern (third layer), and the sub-variation addition pattern (third layer). 4 layers) will be mainly explained. Since this special effect is an effect performed when the game state is the normal game state (or the latent game state), in the following description, the main fluctuation pattern (variation) that is a selection candidate in the game state. The contents of processing in each layer will be described for the main variation addition pattern, the sub-variation pattern, and the sub-variation addition pattern corresponding to the main variation pattern defined in the pattern table 1.

(Main fluctuation addition pattern)
First, the main variation addition pattern in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the main variation addition pattern, the main variation addition table, and the main variation addition pattern. The main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to 1-13 and PA1-1 to 1-14 in the figure correspond to the main fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 1 of FIG. 10 described above. As shown in FIG. 17, each of the main fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to 1-13 and PA1-1 to 1-14 is associated with any one of a plurality of types of main fluctuation addition tables A to F. .. Further, one or a plurality of main variation addition patterns that are selection candidates among the eight types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 are assigned to the main variation addition tables A to F, and the selection candidates are assigned to each of the main variation addition patterns A to F. One or a plurality of types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 are selected by lottery. Although the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted in the figure for convenience, in reality, the lottery random number values (special symbol variable addition pattern random values) acquired for each of the main variable addition tables A to F are obtained. Therefore, a determination number (range of lottery random number values) for determining the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 is set, and the lottery random number value (special symbol variation addition pattern random value) is set to any determination number. One main variation addition pattern is selected from one or a plurality of types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 associated with each main variation addition table A to F based on whether they belong to each other.

The upper part of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the main variation addition patterns PA1-1 to 13 for disconnection, the main variation addition tables A to F, and the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. For example, the main variation addition table A is associated with the main variation pattern PH1-1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, and only the main variation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate. Be identified. The main variation addition patterns B are associated with the main variation addition patterns PH1-3 and 1-4, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1 and 2 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table C is associated with the main variation addition patterns PH1-8 and 1-9, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3 and 7 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table D is associated with the main variation pattern PH1-10, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table E is associated with the main variation addition patterns 1-11, 1-12, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 5, and 7 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table F is associated with the main variation addition patterns 1-13, and it is specified that all the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are selection candidates. ..

The lower part of FIG. 17 shows the correspondence between the main variation addition patterns PA1-1 to 1-14 for big hits, the main variation addition tables A to F, and the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8. For example, the main variation addition table A is associated with the main variation pattern PA1-1 to 1-3, 1-10 to 1-14, and it is specified that only the main variation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate. The main variation addition table C is associated with the main variation addition patterns PA1-4 to 1-5, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table D is associated with the main variation pattern PA1-6, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, and 8 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table E is associated with the main variation addition patterns PA1-7 to 1-8, and it is specified that the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 5, and 7 are selection candidates. The main variation addition table F is associated with the main variation addition pattern PA1-9, and it is specified that all the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are selection candidates. ..

In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, each of the main variable addition tables A to F is configured as a common main variable addition table without distinguishing between the out-of-order and big hit tables, but in reality, it is configured. It is preferable to separately configure the main variable addition tables A to F for loss and the variable addition pattern tables A'to F'for big hits. That is, the main variation addition tables A to F for the loss and the main variation addition tables A'to F'for the jackpot share the same type of main variation addition pattern as a selection candidate, but the loss and the jackpot. It is desirable that the number of judgments (selection rate) is different between the table and the table, so that the special effect (elemental effect) with high expectation can be easily selected for the big hit than for the off-target. For example, the main variation addition table C for loss and the main variation addition pattern table C'for big hit are assigned common main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3 and 7 as the main variation addition patterns of selection candidates, respectively. In the main variation addition table C for big hits, the main variation addition pattern 2 having a relatively low expectation of big hits is easily selected, and in the main variation addition table C'for big hits, the main variation addition with a relatively high expectation of big hits is added. It is possible to easily select and configure pattern 3 (a pattern in which "musou connection", which is an effect with high expectation of big hits, can occur). As for the main variation addition patterns A and A', selection candidates for the main variation addition pattern are not determined, so that only a single main variation addition pattern A may actually be prepared. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is sufficient to prepare a total of 11 types of main variable addition tables, that is, the main variable addition tables A to F for dropping and the main variable addition tables A and B'to F'for big hits. Become. Further, in the main variation addition table A, only the main variation addition pattern 1 described later is a selection candidate, and in this main variation addition pattern 1, "0 seconds" is set as the variation addition time of the symbol, and the effect scale of the special effect is set. Since it means that it is not provided (no special effect is performed), it is not necessary to provide the main variation addition table A and the main variation addition pattern 1 as a modification in the first place. The type of the main variation addition table may be only B to F, and in each table, it is preferable to remove the main variation addition pattern 1 from the main variation addition pattern (selection candidate) shown in FIG. 17 as a selection candidate. be. In this modification, when the lottery for whether or not to perform variable addition is won when the main variable pattern capable of variable addition is selected, the main variable addition table (B to F) corresponding to the main variable pattern is won. The main variation addition pattern may be selected based on any one of the above).

Subsequently, FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram for explaining the main variation addition pattern. In the present embodiment, as described above, all eight types of main variation addition patterns 1 to 8 are prepared. In the main variation addition patterns 1 to 8, different variation addition information (variation addition time) is defined. In the figure, the value of the variable addition time specified by the types of the main variable addition patterns 1 to 8 is omitted, but in reality, one variable addition is made for each main variable addition pattern 1 to 8. Time is associated. The variable addition time has a different time value depending on the types of the main variable addition patterns 1 to 8. In the present embodiment, the number of executions of each element effect (companion participation effect, aura use effect, aura connection effect) and the like are specified by this variable addition information (variable addition time). In the figure, for example, as the variation addition information of the main variation addition pattern 7, "[Naka] 2 [Use] 1 [Concatenation] 0" has two executions of the companion participation effect and one execution number of the aura use effect. This means that the number of times the aura connection effect is executed is 0. In addition, as the variation addition information of the main variation addition pattern 1, "[Naka] 0 [Use] 0 [Concatenation] 0" means that the number of executions of the companion participation effect, the aura use effect, and the aura connection effect is 0 times. (That is, no elemental production is performed). Therefore, in the main variation addition pattern 1, "0 seconds" is set as the variation addition time of the symbol, which means that the effect scale of the special effect is not provided (the special effect is not performed). Therefore, the main variation pattern in which only the main variation addition pattern 1 is a selection candidate (the main variation pattern to which the main variation addition table A is assigned) is the main variation pattern in which the special effect is not executed. In addition, for each of the 7 types of main fluctuation addition patterns 2 to 8, "8 seconds", "12 seconds", "16 seconds", "20 seconds", "14 seconds", and "18 seconds", respectively, as an example. , "22 seconds" may be set. Further, regarding the flow of the main variation addition pattern and the special effect, in order to realize a more diverse effect, not only the types shown in FIG. 18 but also various other main variation addition patterns and the flow of the special effect are provided. You may be.

In addition, the figure shows the flow of special effects corresponding to each variation additional information. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, since there are certain rules for developing each element effect such as the order of participation of fellow characters, the connection condition of the aura, and the order of using the aura, the number of times each element effect is executed. Once decided, the general flow of special production will be decided. However, the execution timing of each element effect (how many times each element effect is performed in the pseudo variation) is specified by the sub-variation addition pattern (details will be described later) in which this main variation addition pattern is sub-expanded. Become.

Although not shown, only the main variation addition table A is associated with the main variation patterns defined in the variation pattern tables 2 to 6 of the special symbols of FIGS. 11 to 15. That is, when the main variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern tables 2 to 6, only the main variation addition table A is associated with any of the main variation patterns selected, and the main variation addition pattern 1 is always associated. Only are candidates for selection. The reason is that the fluctuation pattern tables 2 to 6 are fluctuation pattern tables that are set corresponding to the gaming state (effect mode) in which the special effect is not performed, so that the variation addition time (effect of the special effect) is set. This is because "0 seconds" needs to be set as the scale) (only the main variation addition pattern 1 needs to be selected). Further, as described above, as a modification, when the main variation addition table A and the main variation addition pattern 1 are not provided in the first place, when the variation pattern tables 2 to 6 are referred to and the main variation pattern is selected. In the first place, do not select the main variation addition pattern.

(Sub-variation pattern)
Subsequently, the sub-variation pattern in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation pattern table for loss, and FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a sub-variation pattern table for big hits. Each sub-variation pattern table defines the correspondence between the main variation pattern, the main variation addition table, the main variation addition pattern, and the sub-variation pattern. In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of sub-variation patterns are associated with the combination of one main variation pattern and one main variation addition pattern. Specifically, when one main variation addition pattern is determined for one main variation pattern, one or a plurality of sub-variation patterns corresponding to the combination of the main variation pattern and the main variation addition pattern is selected. Two sub-variation patterns will be selected by lottery. That is, the sub-variation pattern is determined based on the combination of the main variation pattern and the main variation addition pattern. As a modification, one or more sub-variation patterns may be associated with one main variation pattern (that is, not in combination with the main variation addition pattern).

Here, for the main variation pattern (main variation pattern PH1-1 to 1-4, 1-7, 1-10, 1-13) without branching of the effect such as reach effect and fanning effect, one sub-variation pattern Only are associated. On the other hand, there are multiple types of main fluctuation patterns (main fluctuation patterns PH1-5 to 1-6, 1-8 to 1-9, 1-11 to 1-12) that have branches of effects such as reach effects and fanning effects. Sub-variation patterns are associated with each other. For example, two sub-variation patterns PH1-5-1,1-5-2 are associated with the main variation pattern PH1-5 having a branch of the effect. More specifically, this main fluctuation pattern PH1-5 stipulates that it develops into SP reach A or SP reach B after the reach is established, and as a sub-variation pattern associated with it, a sub-variation pattern In PH1-5-1, SP reach A is defined as a development destination, and in the sub-variation pattern PH1-5-2, SP reach B is defined as a development destination. That is, when the branch of the effect is set in the main variation pattern, the type of the effect of the branch destination (for example, the type of SP reach of the development destination) is determined in the sub variation pattern. In other words, 1 main fluctuation pattern PH1-5 is configured to cover two types of SP reach candidates, and the corresponding sub-variation pattern specifies which SP reach will be achieved. It has become.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the type of SP reach is related to the type (number of characters) of the fellow characters appearing in the fellow participation production. Of the multiple types of reach production, SP reach A is a reach production in which one fellow character A appears, SP reach B is a reach production in which two fellow characters A and B appear, and SP reach C is. It is a reach production in which three fellow characters A, B, and C appear. If the companion participation production is performed before developing into the SP reach A to C, it is guaranteed that the companion characters who participated in this companion participation production will also appear in the SP reach. In other words, of the three fellow characters, at least the fellow characters who participated in the fellow participation production will also appear in the SP reach (the number of fellow characters participating in the fellow participation production ≤ the number of fellow characters appearing in the SP reach production). .. Therefore, the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach A (including the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach C via SP reach A) is the variation addition information (main variation addition pattern 1) or 1 in which the fellow character does not participate. It is associated with the variable additional information (main variable additional pattern 2) in which only human fellow characters participate, and is not associated with the variable additional information (main variable additional patterns 3 to 8) in which multiple fellow characters participate. .. The sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach B (including the sub-variation pattern that develops into SP reach C via SP reach B) is the variation addition information (main variation addition pattern) in which one or two fellow characters participate. It is associated with 1 to 7) and is not associated with the variable addition information (main variable addition pattern 8) in which three fellow characters participate in the war. Sub-variation patterns that develop into SP reach C (excluding sub-variation patterns that develop into SP reach C via SP reach A or SP reach B) are all variable additions in which one to three fellow characters participate. It is associated with information (main variation addition patterns 1 to 8). Therefore, for example, the main variation addition table C is associated with the main variation addition table PH1-8, and the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3, and 7 are assigned to the main variation addition table C. Of the main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 3 and 7, the sub variation pattern 1-8-1 (SP reach) is used for the main variation addition patterns 1 and 2 (variation addition information in which only one fellow character participates). A), 1-8-2 (SP reach B) are candidates for selection, while sub-variation patterns 3 and 7 (variable additional information in which multiple fellow characters participate) are sub-variable patterns. Only 1-8-2 (SP reach B) is a candidate for selection. In the present embodiment, the selection candidates of the sub-variation pattern (SP reach type) can be different depending on the main variation addition pattern combined with the main variation pattern in this way.

(Sub-variation addition pattern)
Subsequently, the sub-variation addition pattern in the present embodiment will be described. 21 to 22 are schematic views showing a sub-variation addition pattern table for loss, and FIGS. 23 to 24 are schematic views showing a sub-variation addition pattern table for big hits. In the present embodiment, as described above, the execution timing of each element effect is specified as a detailed pattern in which the basic pattern of the special effect is sub-expanded by this sub-variation addition pattern.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the sub-variation addition pattern table defines the correspondence between the sub-variation addition pattern, the main variation addition pattern, and the sub-variation addition pattern. In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of sub-variation addition patterns are associated with each main variation addition pattern 1 to 8, and any one of the one or a plurality of sub-variation addition patterns is sub-variable. Additional patterns are selected by lottery. In the figure, the numerical value used for the lottery is omitted for convenience, but in reality, the number of determinations (range of the lottery random number value) for determining the sub-variation addition pattern for the acquired lottery random number value. ) Is set, and one sub-variation addition pattern is determined from one or a plurality of types of sub-variation addition patterns based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to. ..

In the figure, [1] to [3] mean the timing at which each element effect is executed. [1] means that the pseudo 1 variation is being executed, [2] means that the pseudo 2 variation is being executed, and [3] means that the pseudo 3 variation is being executed. For example, in "[1] Two-person participation in the war-> [1] Musou connection-> [1] Aura use", the two-friend participation production, the Musou connection production, and the aura use production are performed in order during the execution of the pseudo 1 variation. Means. In addition, in "[1] One companion participation → [1] Musou connection → [2] Normal aura use", one companion participation production and Musou connection production are performed in order during the execution of the pseudo 1 variation, and the pseudo 2 variation. It means that the normal aura use effect is performed during the execution of. In addition, in "[2] Two-person participation in the war → [2] Musou connection → [2] Aura use", the two-friend participation production, the Musou connection production, and the aura use production are performed in order during the execution of the pseudo 2 fluctuation. Means. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of each element effect specified by the sub-variation variation addition pattern means the number of pseudo-variations in which the element effect is to be performed.

At this time, for example, the main variation addition pattern 8 shown in FIG. 21 is associated with three types of sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8-3, and these sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8- One sub-variation addition pattern from 3 will be selected by lottery. In this main variation addition pattern 8, as shown in FIG. 18 above, as a basic pattern of the special production, the flow of the production of "two friends participating → Musou connection → one friend participation → ultimate connection" (each element production). Execution order) has been specified. On the other hand, in the three types of sub-variation addition patterns 8-1 to 8-3 associated with the main variation addition pattern 8, "[1] two companions participate in the war → [1] Musou" as a detailed pattern of the special effect. Concatenation → [1] Two companions participate → [1] Ultimate concatenation ”,“ [1] Two companions participate → [1] Musou concatenation → [2] Two companions participate → [2] Ultimate concatenation ”,“ [2] ] Two friends participate in the war → [2] Musou connection → [2] Two friends participate in the war → [2] Ultimate connection ”, and the execution timing of each element production is specified. In this way, in the sub-variation addition pattern, the execution timing of each element effect (how many pseudo-variations the element effect is performed) is specified based on the flow of each element effect specified in the main variation addition pattern. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the main variation addition pattern (variation addition information) is the same, the selection candidate of the sub-variation addition pattern (execution timing of each element effect) according to the type of the selected sub-variation addition pattern. Is configured to be different. For example, when the sub-variation pattern PH1-3-1 is selected for the same main variation addition pattern 2, only one sub-variation addition pattern 2-1 is selected as the corresponding sub-variation addition pattern. On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern PH1-4-1 is selected, three sub-variation addition patterns 2-1 to 2-3 are selected as the corresponding sub-variation addition patterns. At this time, since the sub-variation pattern PH1-3-1 is a variation effect pattern in which only pseudo 1 variation is performed, only the sub-variation addition pattern 2-1 in which the execution timing of each element effect is pseudo 1 variation is a selection candidate. Will be. On the other hand, since the sub-variation pattern PH1-4-1 is a variation effect pattern in which pseudo 1 variation to pseudo 2 variation are performed, the execution timing of each element effect is pseudo 1 variation or pseudo 2 variation. -1 to 2-3 are the selection targets. In this way, the range of selection of the execution timing of each element effect differs depending on the number of pseudo-reams specified by the sub-variation pattern, so even if the same main variation addition pattern is used, the sub-variation pattern The selection candidates of the sub-variable addition pattern may differ depending on the type of.

Next, the production contents of the special production (each element production) will be described in order. As described above, this special effect is composed of a companion participation effect, an aura connection effect, and an aura use effect as each element effect. Here, FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen (background screen in the normal mode) of the special effect. When the effect mode currently being executed is the normal mode, the logo display area 730 of the screen has a logo icon 731 imitating a logo (indicated as "LOGO" in the illustrated example) indicating the model name of the game machine. An ally icon 732 that imitates the ally character X, which is the main character of this model, and a ally icon 733,734,735 that imitates a plurality of fellow characters A, B, and C are displayed. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the companion icons 733 to 735 changes according to the progress of the special effect (details will be described later). Further, FIG. 26 shows a production pattern table for each element production (companion participation production, aura connection production, aura use production). The detailed contents of this effect pattern table will be described later.

≪Companion participation production≫
FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the companion participation effect and the aura connection effect. The companion participation effect is an effect in which an aura (aura image) is displayed around the companion icons 733 to 735 corresponding to the companion character's participation in the ally character. In the following, "acquiring an aura" means that an aura is displayed around the companion icons 733 to 735. In this embodiment, "companion character A", "companion character B", and "companion character C" are set as a plurality of companion characters, depending on the number of participants (1 person, 2 people, 3 people). It is possible to acquire a large number of auras (1, 2, 3). In other words, the number of fellow characters participating in the war and the number of auras acquired correspond to each other in a 1: 1 relationship. Therefore, as the number of fellow characters participating in the war increases, it is possible to acquire a larger number of auras, and the degree of expectation of pseudo-continuous occurrence or continuation increases.

As mentioned above, there are two types of companion participation productions: one companion participation production in which one companion character participates and acquires one aura, and two companion characters participate in the war at the same time and two auras. There is a production of two companions to acquire. As a modification, a three-person participation effect may be prepared in which three fellow characters A, B, and C participate in the war at the same time and acquire three auras at a time.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of times the companion participation effect is executed is set in the range of "0 times" to "2 times". When the number of executions of the companion participation effect is set to a plurality of times, different ally characters A to C will participate in each companion participation effect. The order of participation of fellow characters A to C is always set to a certain order (appearance order). Specifically, the order of "fellow character A"->"fellow character B"->"fellow character C" is set. The character participates in the war. Therefore, the fellow character B does not participate in the war before the fellow character A, and the fellow character C does not participate in the war before the fellow character B. As a modification of this embodiment, when the fellow characters participate in the war in an order contrary to the regular entry order (when the law is broken), for example, "companion character B" → "companion character A". , The specification may be such that the big hit winning, the pseudo-continuous occurrence, or the continuation is confirmed at that time.

FIG. 26 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a companion participation production pattern table. A plurality of types of companion participation production patterns 1 to 5 are defined in the companion participation production pattern table. In the companion participation production effect patterns 1 to 5, the types of companion characters appearing in the companion participation production and the number of auras (acquired number) acquired in the companion participation production are associated with each other. In the present embodiment, a companion participation effect pattern is selected according to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern (detailed effect pattern of the special effect). That is, in this embodiment, the order of participation of fellow characters is always constant, so if the content of the sub-variable addition pattern (number of participants, number of participations, etc.) is determined, the type and aura of the corresponding fellow characters are acquired. The number is uniquely determined. The companion participation production pattern 1 is a production pattern in which one companion character A participates in the war and acquires one aura. The companion participation production pattern 2 is a production pattern in which one companion character B participates in the war and acquires one aura. The companion participation production pattern 3 is a production pattern in which one companion character C participates in the war and acquires one aura. The companion participation production pattern 4 is a production pattern in which two companion characters A and B participate in the war at the same time and acquire two auras. The companion participation production pattern 5 is a production pattern in which two companion characters B and C participate in the war at the same time and acquire two auras.

Here, when one fellow character participates in the war, according to the above-mentioned order of participation, the fellow character B does not participate in the battle before the fellow character A (companion participation production before the fellow participation production pattern 1). Pattern 2 is not selected), and fellow character C is not selected before fellow character B (companion participation production pattern 3 is not selected before fellow participation production pattern 2). .. Therefore, in the first companion participation production, at least the companion character A will always participate regardless of the number of participants. That is, in the first companion participation production, either the case where only the companion character A participates in the war, or the case where the companion characters A and B participate in the war at the same time.

At this time, if multiple companion participation productions are performed during one variable display, in the second companion participation production, among the multiple companion characters A, B, and C, in the first companion participation production. Only the remaining fellow characters, excluding the fellow characters who participated in the war, can participate in the war. That is, when one fellow character participates in the first fellow participation production (when only the fellow character A participates), the fellow characters B and C can participate in the second fellow participation production. Then, when one fellow character participates in the second fellow participation production, the fellow character B (the fellow character whose participation order comes first) will participate in the battle, and two fellow characters will participate in the second fellow participation production at the same time. In the case of human participation, fellow characters B and C (remaining fellow characters) will participate in the war. On the other hand, if two fellow characters participate in the first fellow participation production at the same time (when fellow characters A and B participate), only one remaining fellow character (friend character C) participates in the second fellow participation production. Will participate in the war.

≪Aura connection production≫
The aura connection effect is an effect in which the plurality of auras are connected and displayed when a plurality of auras are possessed as a result of the companion participation effect. That is, the execution condition of the aura connection effect is that the number of possessed auras is a plurality (2 or 3). Therefore, when the number of possessed auras is one, the execution condition of the aura connection effect is not satisfied, and the aura connection effect is not performed. The "number of auras possessed" means the number of auras actually displayed around the companion icon. Therefore, even if the number of auras acquired in the above-mentioned companion participation production is multiple, if the aura is used in the aura use production described later, the number of auras used will be based on the number of auras possessed. Excluded. In other words, "the number of possessed auras" = "the number of acquired auras"-"the number of used auras". Even if the number of auras possessed is one, if the number of possessed auras becomes a plurality by acquiring another one or two auras without using this one aura. , The aura connection effect is executed.

As described above, there are two types of aura-connected effects: Musou-connected effects and ultimate-connected effects. The Musou Concatenated Staging is a staging in which these two auras are concatenated and displayed when the number of auras possessed becomes two. The ultimate concatenated staging is a staging in which the three auras are concatenated and displayed when the number of auras possessed becomes three. However, even if multiple auras are displayed in a concatenated state, the number of auras held does not change and remains multiple (that is, even if multiple auras are concatenated and displayed in a connected manner, the number of auras remains the same. The number of possessions is not one). Therefore, when the aura is in the unmatched state, the number of auras held is 2, and when the aura is in the ultimate connected state, the number of auras held is 3. Here, when the Musou connection effect is executed (when the aura is in the Musou connection state), the result (true pseudo) that always succeeds when the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is redone in the aura use effect (re-challenge effect) described later. As a result of the continuous fanning effect becoming a successful fanning effect), it is confirmed that the next pseudo-variation will be performed. On the other hand, when the ultimate connection effect is executed (when the aura is in the ultimate connection state), the pseudo-ream effect described later does not fail, and the pseudo-ream 3 times is confirmed. In addition, when the ultimate connection effect is executed (when the aura becomes the ultimate connection state), it is certain that it will develop into SP reach C with a high degree of expectation.

FIG. 26B is a schematic diagram showing an aura connection effect pattern table in the present embodiment. A plurality of types of aura connection effect patterns are defined in the aura connection effect pattern table. In the aura connection effect patterns 1 and 2, the type of the connected state of the aura (Musou connection, ultimate connection) and the type of the fellow character having the aura to be connected are associated with each other. In the present embodiment, an aura connected battle effect pattern corresponding to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern (detailed effect pattern of the special effect) is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, once the content of the sub-variation addition pattern (number of participants, type of aura connection effect, etc.) is determined, the corresponding aura connection effect pattern is uniquely determined. The aura connection effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern in which the auras of the two ally characters A and B are connected and displayed to be in a state of unmatched connection. The aura connection effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern in which the auras of the three ally characters A, B, and C are displayed in a connected manner to be in the ultimate connected state. As a modification of the present embodiment, an effect pattern may be prepared in which the auras of the two ally characters A, C or B, C are in a state of unmatched connection.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 27, an example of the production of the companion participation production and the aura connection production will be described. In FIG. 27, the description of the reference numeral is omitted due to space limitations.

27 (A1) to 27 (A2) are examples of an effect when the aura connection effect is not performed. In this production example, first, as shown in the figure (A1), the fellow character A participates in the war. Subsequently, as shown in (A2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the companion icon 733 corresponding to the companion character A, and one aura is acquired. Since the number of auras possessed at this point is one, the aura connection effect is not executed.

27 (B1) to 27 (B3) are examples of an effect when the Musou connection effect is performed. In this production example, first, as shown in the figure (B1), the aura is displayed on the companion icon 733 corresponding to the companion character A (the companion character A is already participating in the war). B participates in the war. Subsequently, as shown in (B2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the companion icon 734 corresponding to the companion character B, and the number of possessed auras becomes two. Next, as shown in (B3) in the figure, when the number of auras possessed is two, an aura connection effect (musou connection state) is generated, and the auras of the companion icons 733 and 734 are connected and displayed.

27 (C1) to 27 (C3) are examples of an effect when the ultimate connection effect is performed. In this production example, first, as shown in (C1) in the figure, the aura is displayed on the companion icons 733 and 734 corresponding to the companion characters A and B (companion characters A and B have already participated in the war. In the state), fellow character C participates in the war. Subsequently, as shown in (C2) in the figure, an aura is displayed on the companion icon 735 corresponding to the companion character C, and the number of possessed auras is three. Next, as shown in (C3) in the figure, when the number of auras possessed is 3, an aura connection effect (ultimate connection state) is generated, and the auras of the companion icons 733,734,735 are connected and displayed. In addition, while the aura is displayed on the friend icon 733 corresponding to the fellow character A (the state in which the fellow character A is already participating in the war), the fellow characters B and C participate in the war and correspond to the fellow characters B and C. An aura may be displayed on the companion icons 734 and 735, and the aura connection effect (ultimate connection state) may occur when the number of possessed auras is three.

≪Aura use production≫
Next, the aura use effect will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the aura use effect. In the present embodiment, whether or not the pseudo-ream is generated or continued is fueled, and as a result, the pseudo-ream is generated or continued (successful pseudo-ream), or the pseudo-ream is not generated or continued (successful pseudo-ream). Before the pseudo-ream effect (referred to as "true pseudo-repeated effect") that deterministically notifies or suggests any one of the pseudo-repeated effects) is performed, the aura use effect is used as the pre-effect. It is possible to do it. The true pseudo-continuous fanning effect corresponds to the pseudo-continuous fanning (“pseudo 1 fanning”, “pseudo 2 fanning”) defined in the main fluctuation pattern or the sub-variation pattern of FIGS. 19 to 20 and the like. This aura-using effect is a pre-production of a true pseudo-ream effect (pseudo 1 fan, pseudo 2 fan), and is a mere fake pseudo-ream that always results in failure of the pseudo-ream regardless of the progress of the game. It is composed of a fanning effect (referred to as a "fake pseudo-continuous fanning effect") and a re-challenge effect for re-doing the pseudo-continuous fanning effect after the false pseudo-continuous fanning effect is performed. This aura-using effect is as if a pseudo-ream effect is performed by performing a true pseudo-repeated effect (later pseudo-repeated effect) after passing through a fake pseudo-repeated effect (previous pseudo-repeated effect). It is a production to make it look as if the fanning production has been redone again. That is, in the present embodiment, in order to show the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect defined on the main variation pattern or the sub-variable pattern as another pseudo-continuous fanning effect, before the execution of the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect, The aura use production (fake pseudo-continuous fanning production) is interrupted.

Here, FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous fanning effect. (A1) to (A5) in the figure show an example of an effect when the pseudo-enhancement is successful, and (B1) to (B5) in the figure show an example of an effect when the pseudo-enhancement fails. In the pseudo-continuous fanning effect (true pseudo-continuous fanning effect, false pseudo-continuous fanning effect), of the three rows of decorative symbols, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and then the pseudo-continuous fan pattern is displayed as the middle symbol. It is an effect that slowly moves down from the top and incites whether or not a pseudo-ream occurs based on whether or not this pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a temporary stop. The pseudo-continuous symbol is a special symbol (referred to as "NEXT symbol") composed of the characters "NEXT" as an identification element of the decorative symbol. The types of this pseudo-continuous fanning effect are roughly divided into a fanning success effect and a fanning failure effect. As shown in (A1) to (A5) in the figure, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and then the pseudo-continuous symbol (NEXT symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol. So, it is a production that suggests that pseudo-variation is performed. In the present embodiment, the successful fanning effect is not performed as a false pseudo-continuous fanning effect, and the successful fanning effect can be performed only in the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect. On the other hand, in the fanning failure effect, as shown in (B1) to (B5) in the figure, after the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, the pseudo-continuous symbol (NEXT symbol) is not temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle symbol. This is an effect that suggests that pseudo-variation is not performed. In the present embodiment, the fake pseudo-continuous fanning effect always performs the fanning failure effect, and the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect can also perform the fanning failure effect. If the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect is performed as a fanning failure effect, after the NEXT symbol is not displayed as a temporary stop (after the NEXT symbol slides from top to bottom), other decorations different from the left symbol or the right symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed as a middle symbol, it becomes "missing". On the other hand, when a fake pseudo-continuous fanning effect is performed as a fanning failure effect, after the NEXT symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed, only the middle symbol continues to be scrolled, which leads to the re-challenge effect described below. become.

In the present embodiment, as the aura use effect, a fake pseudo-continuous fanning effect (fanning failure effect) is performed, and then a re-challenge effect is performed. Then, after the re-challenge effect is performed, a true pseudo-continuous fanning effect (fanning success effect or fanning failure effect) is performed. In this way, of the two pseudo-continuous fanning effects, the false pseudo-continuous fanning effect is always a failure effect, and the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect is a successful or unsuccessful fanning effect. Depending on whether or not the next pseudo-variation is performed, it is determined. As shown in FIGS. 19 to 20, it should be noted that whether the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect is a fanning success effect or a fanning failure effect is determined in advance according to the selected main fluctuation pattern (or sub-variation pattern). It has been decided. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-repeated production is performed twice before and after the re-challenge effect, and even if the pseudo-repeated effect fails once, the pseudo-repeated effect is performed again. It is possible to raise expectations and further improve the joy of performing pseudo-ren.

The re-challenge effect is an effect for re-doing the pseudo-continuous fanning effect by using the aura acquired in the above-mentioned fellow participation effect after the fake pseudo-continuous fanning effect (fanning failure effect) is performed. This re-challenge effect can be performed if you have one or more auras acquired in the companion entry effect, and it will not be performed without going through the companion entry effect (without acquiring the aura). .. That is, the execution condition of the re-challenge effect (aura use effect) is that one or more auras are actually possessed. Therefore, even if you get an aura by companion participation production, if you no longer have an aura because you have already used it (when the number of auras you have is 0), you can re-challenge the production (aura use production). Is not done. In addition, when the number of auras possessed is 3 (when the aura is in the ultimate connected state), the re-challenge effect (aura use effect) is not performed (pseudo continuous fanning effect fails even once). (No), the occurrence of three pseudo-reams is confirmed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the re-challenge effect (aura use effect) is performed only when the number of possessed auras is one or two.

Specifically, in this re-challenge effect, a predetermined fellow character (referred to as a "re-challenge character") among the three fellow characters uses (consumes) their own aura to perform a specific attack technique (usually). It is a production that delivers a technique or a special technique). Depending on the type of this re-challenge effect (type of attack technique), the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of the pseudo-ream success) that the subsequent pseudo-ream effect will be a success effect is suggested. The above-mentioned "re-challenge character" means the ally character who participated most recently (the ally character whose participation order is late) among the ally characters having an aura. Therefore, if the re-challenge effect is performed when the number of possessed auras is 1, the ally character with that aura becomes the re-challenge character, and when the number of possessed auras is 2, the re-challenge effect is performed. If so, the ally character with the later entry order among the two ally characters with each aura becomes the re-challenge character. Then, when the aura of the re-challenge character is used in the re-challenge effect, the aura of the re-challenge character disappears, and the number of possessed auras is subtracted by one. When the above-mentioned companion participation effect is performed in this way, the number of auras corresponding to the number of companion characters participating increases, whereas when the aura use effect is performed, one aura of the re-challenge character is generated. It will be subtracted.

The types of aura use effects (re-challenge effects) are roughly divided into normal aura use effects and special aura use effects. The normal aura use effect is an effect in which the re-challenge character emits a normal attack technique (referred to as a "normal technique") when the number of possessed auras is one (when the aura is in a non-connected state). .. The special aura use effect is an effect in which the re-challenge character shoots a special attack technique (called a "special technique") when the number of auras possessed is 2 (when the aura is in a state of unmatched connection). .. At this time, when the normal aura use effect is performed, it is not determined whether the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect is the fanning success effect or the fanning failure effect. On the other hand, when a special aura use effect is performed as an aura use effect, it is determined that the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect is a successful effect. At this time, the special aura use effect is an effect in which the aura of the ally character with the later entry order is used when the aura is in a matchless connected state (a state in which the auras of two fellow characters are connected). Of the plurality of fellow characters, the fellow character A does not become a re-challenge character. In addition, when the aura is in the Musou connection state, if a special aura use effect is performed and one aura is used (when the number of auras possessed is subtracted to one), the Musou connection state is canceled. ..

FIG. 26C is a schematic diagram showing an aura use effect pattern table. A plurality of types of aura use effect patterns are set in this aura use effect pattern table, and the type of the re-challenge character and the type of the attack technique are associated with each aura use effect pattern. The aura use effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character A uses the "normal technique 1" as an attack technique. The aura use effect pattern 2 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character B uses the "normal technique 2" as an attack technique. The aura use effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character C uses the "normal technique 3" as an attack technique. The aura use effect pattern 4 is an effect pattern in which the fellow character B uses a "special move" as an attack technique. In the present embodiment, an aura-using effect pattern corresponding to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern (detailed effect pattern of the special effect) is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, once the content of the sub-variation addition pattern (number of participants, type of aura connection effect, order of aura use effect, etc.) is determined, the corresponding aura use effect pattern is uniquely determined.

Next, an example of the production using the aura will be described. 28 (A1) to (A5) are schematic views showing an effect example when a normal aura use effect is performed, and FIGS. 28 (B1) to (B4) show an effect example when a special aura use effect is performed. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

First, an example of a production using a normal aura will be described. The pseudo-continuous fanning effect in the figure (A1) is a false pseudo-continuous fanning effect, and the pseudo-continuous fanning effect in the figures (A4) and (A5) is a true pseudo-continuous fanning effect.

First, as shown in (A1) in the figure, the previous pseudo-continuous fanning effect ends as a fanning failure effect, does not progress to the next pseudo-variation, and only the middle symbol out of the three rows of decorative symbols is displayed in a variable manner (scroll). Display) is continued.

As shown in (A2) in the figure, the aura of the companion icon 733 corresponding to the re-challenge character (companion character A) of this time emits strong light, and the re-challenge character (companion character A) is embodied and displayed.

As shown in (A3) in the figure, it is suggested that the materialized re-challenge character (companion character A) releases a normal technique to redo the pseudo-repetition. In addition, in the case of redoing the pseudo-continuous fanning effect by the normal technique, it is not determined whether the fanning success effect or the fanning failure effect is achieved.

As shown in (A4) in the figure, it is suggested that the following pseudo-variation is performed when the successful fanning effect is performed as the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect. On the other hand, as shown in (A5) in the figure, it is suggested that the next pseudo-variation is not performed when the fanning failure effect is performed as the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect. As shown in (A4) and (A5) in the figure, the aura of the companion icon corresponding to the re-challenge character (companion character A) disappears substantially at the same time as the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect is performed.

Next, an example of the production using the special aura will be described. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous fanning effect in the figure (B1) is a false pseudo-continuous fanning effect, and the pseudo-continuous fanning effect in the figure (B4) is a true pseudo-continuous fanning effect.

First, as shown in (B1) in the figure, the previous pseudo-continuous fanning effect ends as a fanning failure effect, does not progress to the next pseudo-variation, and only the middle symbol out of the three rows of decorative symbols is displayed in a variable manner (scroll). Display) is continued. At this time, the auras of the companion icons 733 and 734 corresponding to the companion characters A and B are in a state of unmatched connection.

As shown in (B2) in the figure, the aura of the companion icon 734 corresponding to the re-challenge character (companion character B) of this time among the companion characters A and B emits strong light, and this re-challenge character (companion character B) Is materialized and displayed.

As shown in (B3) in the figure, it is suggested that the materialized re-challenge character (companion character B) releases a special move to redo the pseudo-repetition. In addition, in the case of redoing the pseudo-continuous fanning by the special move, it is confirmed that the fanning success effect will be achieved (it is confirmed that the next pseudo-variation will progress).

As shown in (B4) in the figure, a subsequent pseudo-continuous fanning effect (in the illustrated example, a successful fanning effect) is performed as a redoing of the pseudo-continuous fanning effect. Almost at the same time as the true pseudo-continuous fanning effect is performed, the aura of the companion icon corresponding to the re-challenge character (companion character B) disappears.

Subsequently, other characteristic configurations applied in the special production of the present embodiment or its modifications will be described. In this embodiment, the higher the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation of big hits, and the more auras (the more auras remain), the more likely it is that the number of pseudo-reams will increase, and the more friends will participate, so the SP with high expectations. Since it is easy to develop into reach, it is configured to raise the expectation of big hits. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram used for explaining the other feature configuration 1 of the special effect, and FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram used for explaining the other feature configuration 2 of the special effect. As described above, the flow of the main variation addition pattern and the special effect is not limited to the types shown in FIG. 18 in order to realize more diverse effects, and various other main variation addition patterns and the flow of the special effect. May be equipped. Here, FIG. 30 (A) shows a flow of a plurality of patterns of the variation effect (branch of the effect) including the flow of the variation effect corresponding to the main variation addition pattern 3 (two-person participation effect → Musou connection effect → special aura use effect). ), And FIG. 30 (B) shows a plurality of patterns including the flow of the variation effect corresponding to the main variation addition pattern 4 (two friends participation effect → Musou connection effect → special aura use effect → normal aura use effect). It shows the flow of variable production (branching of production). Further, FIG. 31 (A) shows a flow of a plurality of patterns of the variation effect (branch of the effect) including the flow of the variation effect corresponding to the main variation addition pattern 3 or 4, and FIG. 31 (B) shows the flow of the main variation addition. The flow of the variation effect of a plurality of patterns including the flow of the variation effect corresponding to the pattern 6 (branch of the effect) is shown, and FIG. 31 (C) includes the flow of the variation effect corresponding to the main variation addition pattern 5 or 7. It shows the flow of variable effects of multiple patterns (branches of effects).

(Other feature composition 1)
Other features As configuration 1, in a situation where a Musou connection state is occurring (having two auras), depending on whether or not it succeeds without using an aura for this pseudo-continuous staging. It is configured so that the degree of expectation for success in the next pseudo-ream production is different. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), in a situation where the pseudo 1 fluctuation is started and the Musou connection state is generated, if the pseudo continuous fanning effect (pseudo 1 fanning) is successful without using the aura, the pseudo 1 fanning is performed. 2 Since the unmatched connection state is maintained at the start of the fluctuation, the next pseudo-ream effect (pseudo 2) is performed regardless of whether or not the re-challenge effect is used (whether or not the pseudo-repeated effect is redone). It is confirmed that it will be successful even in the case of fanning. That is, when the Musou connection state occurs at the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, (a) a route that succeeds in the pseudo 2 fanning in one shot without redoing the pseudo continuous fanning effect, and (b) once in the pseudo continuous fanning effect. After failing, it will progress to one of the routes that succeeds in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect by re-doing it with the re-challenge effect (it is confirmed that it will develop into the pseudo-3 variation). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), in a situation where the pseudo 1 fluctuation is started and the Musou connection state is generated, the aura is used for the pseudo continuous fanning effect (pseudo 1 fanning), and the result is successful (pseudo continuous). After failing once in the fanning effect, if the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is succeeded by re-challenge effect), the Musou connection state is canceled at that point (the Musou connection state is canceled at the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation). Therefore, it is uncertain whether or not the next pseudo continuous fanning effect (pseudo 2 fanning) will succeed. That is, when the Musou connection state is released at the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation (when the number of auras possessed is 1), (a) the pseudo continuous fanning effect is not redone and the pseudo 2 fanning is successful in one shot. Route to be done, (a) After failing once in the pseudo-repeated production, the route that succeeds in the pseudo-repeated production by re-doing the re-challenge production, (c) After failing once in the pseudo-repeated production, re-challenge production Even if it is redone by, it will progress to one of the routes that fails in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect (it is uncertain that it will develop into pseudo 3 fluctuation). Therefore, in the situation where the Musou connection state is occurring (having two auras), the aura is not used for the pseudo-continuous fanning effect than when it is successful as a result of using the aura for the pseudo-continuous fanning effect. If it succeeds, it is more likely that the pseudo-ream will continue (in the illustrated example, the pseudo-ream 3 times is uncertain in the case of the former (B), and the pseudo-ream 3 times in the case of the latter (A). (It is deterministic), and the number of remaining auras is relatively large (in the illustrated example, 0 to 1 aura remains in the case of the former (B), and 1 to 2 in the case of the latter (A). It can be said that the expectation of a big hit will increase accordingly. That is, in the present embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is relatively higher in the pseudo-ream than in the non-pseudo-ream, and in the case of the pseudo-ream, the more the pseudo-ream is (the more it continues), the higher the expectation of the jackpot is. Therefore, the fact that the Musou connection state is maintained at a predetermined timing (in the above example, at the timing of the pseudo-continuous fanning effect in the pseudo 1 fluctuation) means that the Musou connection state is maintained at the predetermined timing. The jackpot expectation is relatively higher than when is released.

(Other feature composition 2)
As another feature configuration 2, the number of fellow characters participating in the variable display is the same (2 people) depending on whether the one-friend participation production is performed twice or the two-friend participation production is performed once. However, it is better when two fellow characters participate in the war than when two fellow characters participate in the battle because the one-friend participation production is performed twice. , The jackpot expectation of the fluctuation display is configured to be relatively high. It is preferable to configure this in a production pattern in which the companion participation effect is performed once during the pseudo 2 variation, and the companion participation effect is not performed or is performed only once during the pseudo 1 variation. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), when two companions participate in the battle once in the pseudo-two fluctuations, the number of auras possessed is two at that time, and a matchless connection state occurs, so the challenge is re-challenged. Regardless of whether or not it goes through the production (whether or not to redo the pseudo-continuous fanning effect), it is confirmed that the next pseudo-continuous fanning effect (pseudo-continuous fanning) will succeed. In other words, if a matchless connection occurs due to one performance of two companions participating in the war (when the number of auras possessed is two), (a) Pseudo-repeating production is not necessary to redo the pseudo-repeating production. It will progress to either a route that succeeds in the departure, or (a) a route that succeeds in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect by re-doing it by re-challenge production after failing once in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect (pseudo 3 variation). It is confirmed that it will develop into). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and 31 (C), when one companion participation production is performed twice from pseudo 1 fluctuation to pseudo 2 fluctuation, the first companion 1 participation production and 2 Depending on whether or not a re-challenge production (re-doing the pseudo-continuous fanning production) intervenes between the first companion participation production, the presence or absence of the unmatched connection state will differ, and the subsequent results will differ. .. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), after the first one-person participation production is performed in the pseudo 1 fluctuation, if the pseudo 1 fan is successful in one shot without redoing the pseudo continuous fan production, the pseudo 2 is performed. In the fluctuation, the number of auras possessed will be 2 at the time when the second one-person participation production is performed, and a matchless connection state will occur. Regardless of whether or not to redo), it is confirmed that the next pseudo continuous fanning effect (pseudo 2 fanning) will be successful. In other words, if a matchless connection occurs due to the fact that one companion participates in the war twice (when the number of auras possessed is two), (a) the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is not redone, and the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is one. It will progress to either a route that succeeds in the departure, or (a) a route that succeeds in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect by re-doing it by re-challenge production after failing once in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect (pseudo 3 variation). It is confirmed that it will develop into). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), after the first one-person participation production was performed in the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the result of using the aura for the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo 1-reaction) was successful (pseudo-ream). After failing once in the fanning effect, if you succeed in the pseudo-continuous fanning effect by redoing the challenge effect), the number of auras possessed will be 0 at that point. Then, even if the second one-person participation production is performed in the pseudo-two fluctuations, the number of auras possessed is only one at that time, and the unmatched connection state does not occur. It is uncertain whether or not it will succeed. In other words, if the Musou connection state does not occur even if the one-person participation production is performed twice (when the number of auras possessed is one), (a) Pseudo-repeating production is performed without re-doing pseudo-two. A route that succeeds in one shot, (a) After failing once in the pseudo-ream effect, a route that succeeds in the pseudo-repeated effect by re-doing it with a re-challenge effect, (c) After failing once in the pseudo-repeated effect , Even if you try again by re-challenge production, it will progress to one of the routes where the pseudo-continuous fanning production fails (it is uncertain that it will develop into pseudo 3 fluctuation). In this way, when one companion participation production is performed twice between the pseudo 1 fluctuation and the pseudo 2 fluctuation, depending on whether or not a re-challenge production (re-doing the pseudo-continuous fanning production) is inserted between them. The result of the next pseudo continuous fanning effect (pseudo 2 fanning) will change. Therefore, it is more pseudo when two fellow characters participate in the battle by performing one fellow participation production than when two fellow characters participate in the battle by performing the one-friend participation production twice. There is a high possibility that the ream will continue (in the illustrated example, in the case of the former (B), the pseudo-ream 3 times is uncertain, and in the case of the latter (A), the pseudo-ream 3 times is definite), and the remaining aura. In the illustrated example, 0 to 2 auras remain in the case of the former (B), and 1 to 2 auras remain in the case of the latter (A)). It can be said that the expectation for big hits is also high. In the lottery process of the main variation addition pattern in the present embodiment, for the main variation addition pattern for big hits, as the corresponding main variation addition pattern, the main variation addition pattern 1, 2, 5 in which the unmatched connection state does not occur The main variation addition patterns 3, 4, 6 and 8 in which the Musou connection state occurs are easier to select than the, 7 and the Musou connection state as the corresponding main variation addition pattern for the main variation pattern for disconnection. The main variation addition patterns 1, 2, 5, and 7 in which the unmatched connection state does not occur may be configured to be easier to select than the main variation addition patterns 3, 4, 6, and 8 in which the above occurs. According to such a configuration, two fellow characters participate in the war once more than when two fellow characters participate in the war (when the occurrence of the Musou connection state is not confirmed) by performing the one-companion participation production twice. It can be said that the jackpot expectation is relatively higher when two fellow characters participate in the war (when the occurrence of the Musou connection state is confirmed). It should be noted that the type of SP reach suggested when the one-person participation production is performed twice and the type of SP reach suggested when the two-person participation production is performed once are the same (SP reach B). Above). In other words, neither the one-friend participation production is performed twice nor the two-friend participation production is performed once, the SP reach A does not develop (the SP reach that denies the development is the same). ), It is suggested that it develops into SP reach B or SP reach C. However, it is easier to develop into SP reach (SP reach C) with a higher expectation when the two-person participation production is performed once than when the one-friend participation production is performed twice. ..

As a modification of this embodiment, a special character other than the fellow characters A to C (““
A specific character (referred to as "specific character") may be prepared so that a specific character may participate in the companion battle production in addition to the companion characters A to C. When a specific character participates in the war, it may be a specification that it is confirmed that the SP reach E will develop into a fierce heat SP reach E with a higher expectation of a big hit than the SP reach A to C. Further, when a specific character participates in the war, the aura corresponding to this specific character is not displayed, and the aura use effect may not be executed (the pseudo-continuous fanning does not fail). ..

[Holding change production]
The hold change effect is a big hit in the change display when the trigger hold is exhausted by changing the display mode of the hold image or the changing image corresponding to the operation hold ball (trigger hold) that is the target of the look-ahead lottery. It is an effect that suggests or informs the possibility of becoming. In the present embodiment, the hold change effect includes a hold image change effect that changes the hold image displayed in the hold image display area 710, and a change image change effect that changes the change image displayed in the change image display area 720. Have. In the following, the two are not distinguished and are simply referred to as a hold change effect, but the hold change effect that changes the hold image may be referred to as a hold image change effect as described above, or the changing image is changed. The pending change effect may be referred to as a changing image change effect as described above.

FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram for explaining the reserved image display area 710 and the changing image display area 720 in the present embodiment. As described above, the lower area in the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided with a hold image display area 710 for displaying the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the special symbol. In the reserved image display area 710, among the activated reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the reserved image corresponding to the activated reserved ball of the special symbol that is the main player of the game in the currently executing gaming state is displayed. Is displayed. That is, when the currently executing game state is the normal game state or the latent game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main body of the game, so that the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol is used. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the currently executing game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game, so that the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed. Each reserved image is displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (order of entry) of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol.

The reserved image display area 710 is provided with four individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 corresponding to the upper limit of the operation holding ball of each special symbol. The individual hold image display area 711 corresponds to the hold image of hold 1 (first hold), the individual hold image display area 712 corresponds to the hold image of hold 2 (second hold), and the individual hold image display area 713 corresponds to the hold image. Corresponds to the hold image of the hold 3 (the third hold), and the individual hold image display area 714 corresponds to the hold image of the hold 4 (the fourth hold). The individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 are configured as display areas of the same size, and each of them can display one reserved image.

On the left side of the reserved image display area 710, a changing image display area 720 for displaying the changing image corresponding to the operation holding ball of the special symbol digested in the variable display is provided. In the changing image display area 720, among the changing displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the changing image corresponding to the changing display of the special symbol of the player who is the main player of the game in the currently executing game state is displayed. Is displayed. That is, when the currently executing gaming state is the normal gaming state or the latent game state, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the main body of the game, and therefore the variable display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the currently executing gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, so that the changing image corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed. The changing image display area 720 is configured as a display area having a size larger than that of the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714.

In the hold image display area 710, each time a special symbol operation hold ball is generated, one hold image (hold 1, hold 2, hold 3, hold 4) is held in order from the individual hold image display area 711 on the left side. ) Is additionally displayed. Further, every time the operation holding ball of the special symbol is digested, the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720 disappears, and the holding image displayed in the individual holding image display areas 711 to 714 (holding). 1. Hold image of hold 2, hold 3, hold 4) moves to the image display area on the left side one by one. Here, the reserved images displayed in the individual reserved image display areas 711 to 714 are digested in order from the left, and the earliest reserved image (held image of reserved 1) displayed in the individual reserved image display area 711 is digested. Then, the reserved image moves to the changing image display area 720, is displayed as a changing image corresponding to the changing display, and is continuously displayed until the end of the changing display. However, in a situation where a specific effect is occurring, such as after the development of the SP reach effect, the reserved image and the changing image may be hidden. In that case, the specific effect is completed ( The background effect before developing into the SP reach effect, for example, if you are staying in the normal mode, when you return to the background effect corresponding to the normal mode), the pending image and the changing image are redisplayed. The display of the changing image is terminated when the variation display ends, while the reserved image is continuously displayed even after the variation display ends (shifted to the left). Further, as a modification, the reserved image and the changing image may be continuously displayed even in a situation where a specific effect is generated, such as after the development of the SP reach effect, and in that case, the end of the variable display. The display of the changing image may be terminated as a trigger, while the reserved image may be configured to be continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variable display is completed. In addition, as another modification, if a specific effect is occurring, such as after the development of SP reach effect, the reserved image may be hidden, while the changing image may be continuously displayed. In that case, when the specific effect is completed (the background effect before developing into the SP reach effect, for example, when the background effect is restored to the normal mode if the user is staying in the normal mode), The hold image is redisplayed, and the display of the changing image is terminated when the variation display ends, while the hold image is continuously displayed (shifted to the left) even after the variation display ends. You may. Here, for the present embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modifications, the display time of the changing image may be different depending on the jackpot expectation of the variable display. With such a configuration, it is possible to estimate the jackpot expectation by paying attention to the changing image in addition to the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream effect, the number of pseudo-ream effects, the presence / absence of the SP reach effect, and the type of the SP reach effect. can. Here, by paying attention not only to the type of the changing image but to the display time thereof, there is a sense of expectation for a different display time of the notice effect other than the display mode of the notice effect. be able to. In addition, regarding the display specifications of the above-mentioned reserved image and changing image (including those described as modification examples), in order to unify the playability and the appearance of the effect, other gaming states (other than the low probability low base state) are used. On the contrary, in order to diversify the playability and the appearance of the effect, it may be applicable only in the low probability and low base state, and may not be applied in other game states.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of reserved images and changing images that are different for each effect mode are prepared, and the types of reserved images and changing images corresponding to the currently executing effect mode are displayed. That is, the reserved image and the changing image are images dedicated to each effect mode, which are different from each other between the normal mode (special mode), the suppression chance mode, the phantom fight rush mode, and the revenge mode. In the following, the reserved image in the normal mode is referred to as "holding image HA", the changing image is referred to as "changing image HB", the holding image in the suppression chance mode is referred to as "holding image Ha", and the changing image is referred to as "changing image". It is called "Hb".

In the present embodiment, the changing image is created as a reference image (original image), and a reduced image obtained by scaling the changing image is generated as a hold image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the drawing process for displaying the reserved image is performed, the changing image is read out from the image data memory as the reference image data (original image data), and the reference image data is reduced. Image data is used as a reserved image. Specifically, an image obtained by reducing the number of pixels (pixels) forming a fluctuating image at a predetermined reduction ratio (also referred to as "image reduction ratio") in both the horizontal and vertical directions when viewed from the player. Configure as a hold image. For example, if the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the changing image is "N" and the number of pixels in the vertical direction is "M", and the reduction ratio is "1 / X (however, X>1)", the reserved image The number of pixels in the horizontal direction is "N / X", and the number of pixels in the vertical direction is "M / X". In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the reserved image with respect to the changing image is set to be different for each effect mode. Here, the definition that the reduction ratio "1 / X" is large is that "1/100" has a larger reduction ratio than, for example, "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio "1 / X2" of the reserved image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is higher than the reduction ratio "1 / X1" of the reserved image HA with respect to the changing image HB in the normal mode. It is configured to be large. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the reduction ratio of the reserved image HA with respect to the changing image HB in the normal mode is "1 / X1 = 1 / 1.18", and the reserved image HA is the changing image HB. The display size is reduced to about 85%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 39, the reduction ratio of the reserved image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is "1 / X2 = 1 / 1.33", and the reserved image Ha is about 75 of the changing image Hb. It is reduced to the display size of%. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the image size difference between the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode is larger than the image size difference between the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode. It's getting bigger. The image size difference means the difference in the relative size of the reserved image with respect to the changing image.

As a modification, the reduction ratio of the reserved image HA with respect to the changing image HB in the normal mode "1 / X1" is larger than the reduction ratio of the reserved image Ha with respect to the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. It may be configured. That is, the image size difference between the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode may be larger than the image size difference between the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. ..

<Pending image in normal mode / Floating image>
When the currently executing effect mode is the normal mode (including the special mode), the "normal display mode" and the "special display mode" are set as the display modes of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram for explaining the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is white.

(Special display mode)
The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is red. The special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is gold. The special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is rainbow color.

In the present embodiment, there are six display modes of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB: a normal display mode, a special display mode 1, a special display mode 2, a special display mode 3, a special display mode 4, and a special display mode 5. It is set. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the normal display mode is the "white icon", the special display mode 1 is the "blue icon", the special display mode 2 is the "green icon", the special display mode 3 is the "red icon", and the special display. The aspect 4 is also referred to as a “golden icon”, and the special display aspect 5 is also referred to as a “rainbow-colored icon”. On the drawing, "white", "blue", "green", "red"
, "Golden" and "Rainbow" are expressed by adding the names of the above colors in the reserved image HA or the changing image HB. That is, on the drawing, the characters "white" are attached to represent the reserved image HA and the changing image HB of the white icon, and the characters "blue" are attached to represent the reserved image HA and the changing image HB of the blue icon. With the letters "green" to represent the pending image HA and the changing image HB of the green icon, and with the letters "red" to represent the holding image HA and the changing image HB of the red icon. Then, the characters "gold" are attached to represent the reserved image HA and the changing image HB of the golden icon, and the characters "rainbow" are attached to represent the reserved image HA and the changing image HB of the rainbow icon. ..

Here, the display mode of the reserved image and the changing image is related to the reliability (big hit expectation) at which the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, and "white" <"blue" <"green" < The jackpot expectation is set to increase by one step in the order of "red" <"gold" <"rainbow". That is, it is easier to select the reserved image or the changing image in the display mode having a high expectation of a big hit in the case where the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit" than in the case where the result is "missing". In addition, "rainbow color" means a premier display mode in which the jackpot winning is definite. Therefore, when a "rainbow-colored" reserved image appears or changes to a "rainbow-colored" reserved image, it is guaranteed that a big hit will be won on the variable display corresponding to the reserved image. In addition, when a changing image of "rainbow color" appears or changes to a changing image of "rainbow color", it is guaranteed that a big hit will be won in the variable display. The display mode of the reserved image and the changing image may be expressed not by the display color but by, for example, a shape, a size, a pattern, an motion (motion), or the like.

As described above, the hold change effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the change display by changing the display mode of the hold image HA or the changing image HB dedicated to the normal mode. In the present embodiment, in each variation display from the variation display when the trigger hold occurs, which is the mode of the look-ahead lottery, to the variation display when the trigger hold is exhausted, the hold image HA or the corresponding variable display is in progress. The display mode of the image HB may change. Whether or not the hold change effect can be executed is determined by the hold change look-ahead lottery using the effect lottery random numbers.

FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change look-ahead lottery table in the normal mode. The hold change look-ahead lottery in the normal mode is executed at a predetermined lottery timing. The predetermined lottery timing is when a new operation-holding ball with a special symbol is generated (at the time of starting winning). In the hold change look-ahead lottery, whether or not to execute the hold change effect is determined by lottery, and when it is decided to execute the hold change effect, the hold change pattern is determined. The operation hold ball that is the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery is the operation hold ball of the first special symbol generated by the new start winning. That is, since the variable display of the first special symbol is the main body of the game during the execution of the normal mode, the operation hold ball of the first special symbol is the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery. Here, the execution conditions of the hold change look-ahead lottery are that the pre-judgment result of the operation hold ball (trigger hold) of the first special symbol to be the target of the look-ahead lottery is "big hit" and "N reach loss (N reach type loss)". ) ”And“ SP reach loss (SP reach type loss) ”. Therefore, if the pre-judgment result of the trigger hold corresponds to "non-reach loss (non-reach type loss)", it is excluded from the hold change look-ahead lottery.

As shown in FIG. 34, the hold change look-ahead lottery table determines whether or not the hold change look-ahead effect can be executed. In the figure, the "selection rate" is shown for convenience, but in reality, the number of judgments (lottery random number value) for determining whether or not the hold change look-ahead effect can be executed according to the acquired lottery random number value. Range) is set, and whether or not the hold change look-ahead effect can be executed is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to. In the figure, either "execution" or "non-execution" can be selected for the pre-judgment result (big hit, SP reach loss, N reach loss) of the trigger hold that is the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery. Selectivity (
The number of judgments) is allocated, and the jackpot expectation is set to be higher when the hold change look-ahead effect is "executed" than when it is "non-executed". As a modification of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the hold change look-ahead lottery may be higher as the number of operation hold balls increases. Here, when it is decided to execute the hold change effect in this hold change look-ahead lottery, the hold change pattern (hold change) in which the scenario of the change in the display mode of the hold image and the changing image is defined. The production pattern) is decided by lottery.

Next, the pending change pattern in the normal mode will be described. 35 to 38 are schematic views showing a pending change pattern table in the normal mode. 35 is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 1, FIG. 36 is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 2, and FIG. 37 is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 3. FIG. 38. Is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 4. In the figure, the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted for convenience, but in reality, there is a table corresponding to the acquired pre-judgment information (hit / fail pre-judgment information and fluctuation pattern pre-judgment information), and each table has a table. A judgment number (range of lottery random number values) for determining a hold change pattern for the lottery random number value is set, and the hold change pattern is based on which judgment number the lottery random value belongs to. It is supposed to be decided.

A plurality of pending change patterns (ID numbers) are set in the pending change pattern table. The hold change pattern is a scenario in which the route of change in the display mode of the hold image HA and the changing image HB related to the trigger hold is defined. Based on this hold change pattern, the display mode of the hold image HA and the changing image HB changes each time from the change display when the trigger hold occurs to the change display when the trigger hold is exhausted (when the hold occurs). , Hold 3 fluctuation, Hold 2 fluctuation, Hold 1 fluctuation, Target fluctuation) are specified in chronological order. The hold change of the hold image HA and the changing image HB occurs at the start timing of each change display (the period from the end of the previous change display to the start of the current change display). Specifically, it is the timing immediately after each reserved image is shifted to the next lower image display area due to the digestion of the earliest activated holding ball (however, it may be the timing immediately before the shift). .. On the other hand, the display mode of the changing image changes at a predetermined timing during the changing display. This predetermined timing is any one of the timing of the start of the pseudo 1 fluctuation (the fluctuation), the timing of the start of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, the timing of the start of the pseudo 3 fluctuation, the timing of the reach establishment, and the timing of the SP reach development. It is the timing of.

Here, in the figure, "when a hold occurs" means when a trigger hold, which is the target of the look-ahead lottery, occurs (at the time of starting winning). Therefore, in the "when hold occurs" column, the display mode (initial display mode) of the hold image HA displayed in the variable display when the trigger hold occurs is set. In the figure, "Hold 3 fluctuation" is the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 3 (third hold), and "Hold 2 fluctuation" is the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 2 (second hold). , "Hold 1 fluctuation" means a fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 1 (first hold), and "target fluctuation" means a fluctuation display when the trigger hold is exhausted (the fluctuation display). Therefore, in the "hold 3 fluctuation" column, the display mode of the hold image HA displayed in the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 3, and in the "hold 2 fluctuation" column, when the trigger hold is hold 2. In the column of "Holding 1 fluctuation", the display mode of the reserved image HA displayed in the fluctuation display of "Holding 1" In the column, the display mode of the changing image HB displayed in the variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted is set. In the present embodiment, changing the display mode of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB means that the display mode is promoted (ranked up), and that the display mode is demoted (ranked down). Not included. "Promotion" includes when the display mode of the reserved image HA or the changing image HB is promoted by one step for each change (for example, when the display mode changes from "blue" to "green" by one step), and the reserved image HA or There is a case where the display mode of the changing image HB is promoted by two steps for each change (for example, when the display mode changes from "blue" to "red" by two steps).

Although the pending change pattern table is omitted in FIGS. 35 to 38, the selection rate of the pending change pattern differs depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is the information indicating a big hit or the information indicating a deviation. Is set to. First, in the pending change pattern, as a general rule, a selection rate (determination number) is assigned according to the final display mode of the changing image (pending image), and the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit. In the case (or when the information indicates a long-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation of big hit), the selection rate is in the order of "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold" in the final display mode. Is set to be higher, but when the result of the pre-judgment is information indicating a deviation (or when the information indicates a short-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation), the higher the value is. The final display mode is set so that the selection rate increases in the order of "gold" <"red" <"green" <"blue". If the display mode of the reserved image HA or the changing image HB is "rainbow color", it is guaranteed that the jackpot will be won by the variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted. Therefore, the above-mentioned five types of display modes (final display modes) of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are closely related to the degree of expectation that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol will be a big hit, and "blue" < Expectations for big hits increase by one step in the order of "green" <"red" <"gold" <"rainbow".

Further, even when the final display mode of the changing image HB (reserved image HA) is the same display mode, it is higher than the case where the final display mode is changed to the final display mode after one step of promotion (rank up). It is set so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the final display mode is changed after two stages of promotion (rank up). That is, even if the final display mode of the changing image HB (reserved image HA) is the same, the larger the promotion width (number of stages of promotion) until the display mode is changed, the higher the expectation of big hit. ..

Further, when the promotion width until the change to the final display mode is the same, the delay in the timing of the change is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher. That is, the later the timing of changing from the normal display mode (default display) to the special display mode, or the timing of changing from the lower special display mode to the higher special display mode, the higher the expectation of big hit. Therefore, in the plurality of variable displays, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the display mode of the reserved image HA or the variable image HB does not change at an early timing.

In the present embodiment, the promotion width of one time is set to two stages at the maximum, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion width of one time may be set to three or more stages, which is the opposite. The promotion range may be limited to only one step. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image HA or the changing image HB changes only once during the execution of one variable display, but the reserved image is changed during the execution of one variable display. The display mode of HA or the changing image HB may be changed a plurality of times. In particular, in the variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted, it is preferable that the display mode of the variable image HB changes a plurality of times, that is, the reserved image HA is executed during one variable display. The display mode of the image HB changes at most once, but the display mode of the changing image HB changes a plurality of times during the execution of one variable display (for example, it changes 1 to 3 times). It is preferable to configure it so that it may occur. Further, as the display mode of the changing image HB, a special display mode that is not set in the display mode of the reserved image HA may be set. Further, as a modification, if there is a first timing which is the timing of the first half of the fluctuation display and a second timing which is the timing of the second half of the fluctuation display as the timing in which the display mode of the changing image HB can be changed, the second timing. It may be configured so that the display mode of the changing image HB is more likely to change to the display mode with high expectation. As an example, in the 40-second fluctuation display in which SP reach C is performed, when the display mode of the changing image HB at the start of fluctuation is blue, or when the display mode changes at the first timing 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, It is highly likely that it will turn green, but it is unlikely that it will turn red, but if it changes at the second timing 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation, it is unlikely that it will turn green and it may turn red. It may be made highly sexual. In addition, the above-mentioned specifications for changing the display mode (including those described as modification examples) can be applied to other game states (other than the low-probability low-base state) in order to unify the playability and the appearance of the effect. On the contrary, in order to diversify the playability and the appearance of the effect, it may be applicable only in the low probability and low base state, and may not be applied in other game states.

<Reserved image / changing image in suppression chance mode>
When the effect mode currently being executed is the suppression chance mode, the "normal display mode" and the "special display mode" are set as the display modes of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram for explaining the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode.

(Normal display mode)
The normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character icon imitating a specific enemy character (so-called small fish character). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, as a display mode of the changing image Hb, a special normal display mode (also referred to as a “specific display mode”) is prepared in addition to this normal normal display mode. There is. This specific display mode (special normal display mode) is a display mode in which a plurality of character icons are superimposed on the front and back in the changing image display area 720 (see FIG. 46 for details). The detailed contents of the specific display mode will be described later.

(Special display mode)
The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character A icon that imitates a specific character A (a “subtle” character). The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character B icon that imitates a specific character B (character of “opportunity”). The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a character C icon that imitates a specific character C (character of "super heat").

In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal display mode (including the specific display mode), the special display mode 1, the special display mode 2, and the special display mode 3 are set as the display modes of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb. ing. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the normal display mode is the "character icon", the special display mode 1 is the "character A icon", the special display mode 2 is the "character B icon", and the special display mode 3 is the "character C icon". Also called.

Here, the display mode of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb is related to the reliability (big hit expectation) at which the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit, and "character icon" <"character A icon". The jackpot expectation is set to increase by one step in the order of <"character B icon" <"character C icon". That is, it is easier to select the reserved image or the changing image in the display mode having a high expectation of a big hit in the case where the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit" than in the case where the result is "missing". The display mode of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb may be expressed not by the shape of the image but by, for example, a display color, a pattern, an motion (motion), or the like.

As described above, the hold change effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit in the change display by changing the display mode of the hold image Ha or the changing image Hb dedicated to the suppression chance mode. In the present embodiment, in each variation display from the variation display when the trigger hold occurs, which is the mode of the look-ahead lottery, to the variation display when the trigger hold is exhausted, the hold image Ha corresponding to the variable display or the variable display is in progress. The display mode of the image Hb may change. Whether or not the hold change effect can be executed is determined by the hold change look-ahead lottery using the effect lottery random numbers.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing a hold change look-ahead lottery table in the suppression chance mode. The hold change look-ahead lottery in the suppression chance mode is executed at a predetermined lottery timing. The predetermined lottery timing is when a new operation-holding ball with a special symbol is generated (at the time of starting winning). In the hold change look-ahead lottery, whether or not to execute the hold change effect is determined by lottery, and when it is decided to execute the hold change effect, the hold change pattern is determined. The operation hold ball that is the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery is the operation hold ball generated by the new start prize. Therefore, even if one or more operation hold balls (preceding operation hold balls) already exist, the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery is the newly generated operation hold ball. In the present embodiment, in the game state (normal game state, latent game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, the operation hold ball of the first special symbol is the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery. 2 In the game state (probability change game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the special symbol is the main game, the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is subject to the hold change look-ahead lottery. The execution condition of this hold change look-ahead lottery is that the pre-determination result of the operation hold ball (trigger hold) that is the target of the look-ahead lottery corresponds to either "big hit" or "missing". In the suppression chance mode, "N reach loss (N reach type loss)" or "SP reach loss (SP reach type loss)" is not set as the type of loss due to the adoption of battle specs. Therefore, unlike the normal mode, when the result of the pre-determination is "non-reach loss (non-reach type loss)", it is subject to the pending change look-ahead lottery.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a hold change look-ahead lottery table in the suppression chance mode. In the hold change look-ahead lottery table, it is determined whether or not the hold change look-ahead effect can be executed. In the figure, the "selection rate" is shown for convenience, but in reality, the number of judgments (lottery random number value) for determining whether or not the hold change look-ahead effect can be executed according to the acquired lottery random number value. Range) is set, and whether or not the hold change look-ahead effect can be executed is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to. In the figure, the selection rate (selection rate) so that either "execution" or "non-execution" can be selected for the pre-judgment result (big hit, non-reach loss) of the trigger hold that is the target of the hold change look-ahead lottery. Judgment number) is allocated, and when the hold change look-ahead effect is "executed" than when it is "executed", the jackpot expectation or jackpot advantage (probability change, number of prize balls) Is set to be high. As a modification of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the hold change look-ahead lottery may be higher as the number of operation hold balls increases. Here, when it is decided to execute the hold change effect in this hold change look-ahead lottery, the hold change pattern (holding change pattern) in which the scenario of the change in the display mode of the hold image Ha and the changing image Hb is defined. Hold change effect pattern) is decided by lottery.

Next, the pending change pattern in the suppression chance mode will be described. 41 to 44 are schematic views showing a hold change pattern table of the suppression chance mode. 41 is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 1, FIG. 42 is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 2, and FIG. 43 is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 3. FIG. 44. Is set when the trigger hold occurs as hold 4. In the figure, the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted for convenience, but in reality, there is a table corresponding to the acquired pre-judgment information (hit / fail pre-judgment information and fluctuation pattern pre-judgment information), and each table has a table. A judgment number (range of lottery random number values) for determining a hold change pattern for the lottery random number value is set, and the hold change pattern is based on which judgment number the lottery random value belongs to. It is supposed to be decided.

A plurality of pending change patterns (ID numbers) are set in the pending change pattern table. The hold change pattern is a scenario in which the route of change in the display mode of the hold image Ha and the changing image Hb related to the trigger hold is defined. Based on this hold change pattern, the display mode of the hold image Ha and the changing image Hb changes each time from the change display when the trigger hold occurs to the change display when the trigger hold is exhausted (when the hold occurs). , Hold 3 fluctuation, Hold 2 fluctuation, Hold 1 fluctuation, Target fluctuation) are specified in chronological order. The display mode of the reserved image Ha changes at the start timing of each variation display (at least the period from the end of the previous variation display to the start of the current variation display). Specifically, it is the timing immediately after each reserved image is shifted to the next lower image display area due to the reserved digestion (however, it may be the timing immediately before the shift). On the other hand, the display mode of the changing image Hb changes at the timing of starting the variable display.

Here, in the figure, "when a hold occurs" means when a trigger hold, which is the target of the look-ahead lottery, occurs (at the time of starting winning). Therefore, in the "when hold occurs" column, the display mode (initial display mode) of the hold image displayed in the variable display when the trigger hold occurs is set. In the figure, "hold 3 fluctuation" is the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 3 (third hold), and "hold 2 fluctuation" is the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 2 (second hold). , "Hold 1 fluctuation" means a fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 1 (first hold), and "target fluctuation" means a fluctuation display when the trigger hold is exhausted (the fluctuation display). Therefore, in the "hold 3 fluctuation" column, the display mode of the hold image Ha displayed in the fluctuation display when the trigger hold is hold 3, and in the "hold 2 fluctuation" column, when the trigger hold is hold 2. In the column of "Holding 1 fluctuation", the display mode of the reserved image Ha displayed in the variable display of "Holding 1", the display mode of the holding image Ha displayed in the variable display when the trigger hold is Hold 1, "Target fluctuation". In the column, the display mode of the changing image Hb displayed in the variable display when the trigger hold is exhausted is set. In the present embodiment, changing the display mode of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb means that the display mode is promoted (ranked up) from the normal display mode to the special display mode, and the display mode is It does not include demotion (rank down) from the special display mode to the normal display mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial display mode of the hold image Ha at the time of hold occurrence (starting prize) is always the normal display mode (character icon), but the hold is not limited to this configuration and the hold occurs. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial display mode of the reserved image Ha at the time (at the time of starting winning) is a special display mode (character icon). That is, the hold image Ha may be configured to suddenly appear in a special display mode (character icon) when the hold occurs (at the time of starting winning).

Although the pending change pattern table is omitted in FIGS. 41 to 44, the selection rate of the pending change pattern differs depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is the information indicating a big hit or the information indicating a deviation. Is set to. First, in the pending change pattern, as a general rule, a selection rate (determination number) is assigned according to the final display mode of the changing image (pending image), and the result of the preliminary determination is information indicating a big hit. In the case (or when the information indicates a long-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively high expectation of big hit), the final display mode is in the order of "character A icon" <"character B icon" <"character C icon". When the selection rate is set to be high, but the result of the pre-judgment is information indicating an error (or when the information indicates a short-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation). The final display mode is set so that the selection rate increases in the order of "character C icon" <"character B icon" <"character A icon". Therefore, the above-mentioned four types of display modes (final display modes) of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb are closely related to the degree of expectation that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol will be a big hit, and the "character A icon". "<" Character B icon "<" Character C icon ", the jackpot expectation increases one step at a time. In addition, the display mode in which the big hit is confirmed is not set in the display mode of the reserved image Ha and the changing image Hb in the suppression chance mode. However, as a modification of this embodiment, a special display mode (for example, a character icon imitating the character "correct") may be set to confirm the big hit.

Further, when the final display mode of the changing image Hb (reserved image Ha) is the same display mode, the delay in the timing of the change is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher. That is, the later the timing of changing from the normal display mode (default display) to the special display mode, the higher the expectation of big hit. Therefore, in the plurality of variable displays, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the display modes of the reserved image Ha and the variable image Hb do not change at an early timing.

In the suppression chance mode, unlike the above-mentioned normal mode, the number of pending changes performed in one or a plurality of variable displays is only once, and the display mode of the reserved image Ha or the variable image Hb is normally displayed. It is set only when the aspect changes from the aspect to any of the special display aspects 1 to 4. Therefore, the display mode of the reserved image Ha or the changing image Hb does not change from the lower special display mode to the higher special display mode. That is, when the display mode of the reserved image Ha or the changing image Hb changes to a special display mode of any one of a plurality of types of special display modes 1 to 4, the special display mode is the final display mode. Become. As a modification of the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image Ha may be configured to change a plurality of times in one or a plurality of variable displays. In that case, unlike the above-mentioned normal mode, it is preferable to reduce the number of changes as compared with the normal mode even if the mode is configured to change a plurality of times (the display mode of the reserved image Ha is one or a plurality of times). When changing multiple times in the variable display, it is preferable that the maximum number of changes in the normal mode is larger than the maximum number of changes in the suppression chance mode).

Here, when a specific hold change pattern is selected from the above-mentioned plurality of types of hold change patterns, a special hold change effect that does not appear in any other scene (effect mode) is performed. The "specific pending change pattern" is a pending change pattern in which a pending change occurs in the variation display (target variation). Specifically, the ID numbers are "1-1", "1-2", "1-3", "2-1", "2-3", "2-5", "3-1", It is a pending change pattern of "3-4", "3-7", "4-1", "4-5", and "4-9". In the special hold change effect, in the variation display from the occurrence of the trigger hold to the digestion (variation display until the variation display is reached), the changing image Hb is used every time the preceding operation hold ball is digested. This is an effect in which the display mode of the above is changed to a special normal display mode (specific display mode) different from the normal normal display mode. The specific display mode is a display mode in which a plurality of character icons are displayed in an overlapping state, unlike a normal normal display mode (a display mode in which one character icon is displayed independently). In the following, for convenience of explanation, the display mode in which the two character icons are displayed in the superimposed state is referred to as "specific display mode 2", and the display mode in which the three character icons are displayed in the superimposed state is referred to as "specific display mode 3". do.

Next, an example of the effect of the hold change effect in the suppression chance mode will be described. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram showing an effect example of the hold change effect in the suppression chance mode. In this effect example, the effect mode is the suppression chance mode, and the hold image Ha corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is displayed. In the figure, the reserved image display area 710 and the changing image display area 720 are mainly represented as a part of the screen due to space limitations.

As shown in (A) in the figure, in a certain variation display (Nth variation display), three reserved images Ha1 to Ha3 corresponding to the operation pending ball of the second special symbol and the variation are displayed on the screen. The changing image Hb0 corresponding to the display (variation display of the second special symbol) is displayed. In the figure, the first reserved image is "Ha1", the second reserved image is "Ha2", and the third reserved image is in accordance with the entry order of the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol at this time. Is represented by "Ha3", and the changing image is represented by "Hb0". In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the second reserved image Ha2 at the present time is the reserved image corresponding to the trigger hold. In the figure, all of the reserved images Ha1 to Ha3 and the changing image Hb0 are displayed in the normal display mode (character icon).

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the Nth variation display is completed, the earliest reserved image Ha1 is digested to shift to the variable image display area 720 and switch to the variable image Hb1. Hold images HA2 and HA3 shift to the left.

As shown in (C) in the figure, a hold change suggestion effect (hit effect) is generated to incite whether or not a hold change occurs when the hold image Ha2 (character icon) corresponding to the trigger hold is hit from the outside. do.

As shown in (D) in the figure, as a result of the character icon being destroyed by being hit from the outside, the display mode of the reserved image Ha2 becomes a special display mode (character C icon imitating the character "opportunity"). After changing, the next fluctuation display (N + 1th fluctuation display) is started. In addition, as the above-mentioned hold change suggestion effect, there may be a ghost effect in which the hold change does not occur even if the character icon is hit. In addition, when a batter effect is provided, a plurality of batter effect effect patterns, which are hold change suggestion effects that incite whether or not a hold change occurs, may be provided. A large hit pattern can be configured so that the display mode of the reserved image Ha is more likely to change, or if the display mode changes, it can change to the display mode of the reserved image Ha with a high expectation of a big hit. It may be configured to be more likely (a large hit pattern is more likely to change to a letter C icon than a small hit pattern).

Next, an example of the special hold change effect in the suppression chance mode will be described. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a special hold change effect in the suppression chance mode. In this effect example, the effect mode is the suppression chance mode, and the hold image Ha corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is displayed. In the figure, the reserved image display area 710 and the changing image display area 720 are mainly represented as a part of the screen due to space limitations.

As shown in (A) in the figure, during the execution of a certain variation display (Nth variation display), a new operation hold ball of the second special symbol is generated by the start winning, and this operation hold ball (trigger hold). ), The hold image Ha3 corresponding to the operation hold ball is displayed as the third hold image corresponding to the hold order by winning the hold change look-ahead lottery. In the figure, the first reserved image is "Ha1", the second reserved image is "Ha2", and the third reserved image is in the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol at this time according to the order of entry. (Holding image related to trigger holding) is represented by "Ha3", and the changing image to be displayed in a variable manner is represented by "Hb0". At this point, all of the reserved images Ha1 to Ha3 and the changing image Hb0 are displayed in the normal display mode (character icon).

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the Nth variation display is completed, the earliest reserved image Ha1 is digested to shift to the variable image display area 720 and switch to the variable image Hb1. The reserved images Ha2 and Ha3 are shifted to the left, and the next fluctuation display (N + 1th fluctuation display) is started. In addition, at the start of this variable display, a special effect effect is generated in which all the character icons are struck by lightning and are charged with electricity (charged state). This special effect effect is a hold change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold image (or the changing image) related to the trigger hold changes from the normal display mode to the special display mode. This special effect effect is continuously performed until the hold image Ha3 related to the trigger hold moves to the changing image display area 720 (until the trigger hold is exhausted).

As shown in (C) in the figure, when the N + 1th variation display is completed, the earliest reserved image Ha2 is digested to shift to the changing image display area 720, switch to the changing image Hb2, and hold the image. After the image Ha3 is shifted to the left, N + second variation display is started. At this time, when the reserved image Ha2 is switched to the changing image Hb2, the display mode of the changing image Hb2 changes to the specific display mode 2 (special normal display mode). The specific display mode 2 is a display mode in which two character icons are displayed in a superimposed state. However, apparently, the character icon corresponding to the previous fluctuation display does not disappear from the changing image display area 720, and the character icon corresponding to this previous fluctuation display and the character corresponding to the current fluctuation display remain. It seems that the icons are displayed side by side in the changing image display area 720.

As shown in (D) in the figure, when the N + second variation display is completed, the earliest reserved image Ha3 is digested to shift to the variable image display area 720 and switch to the variable image Hb3. At this time, when the reserved image Ha3 is switched to the changing image Hb3, the display mode of the changing image Hb3 changes to the specific display mode 3 (special normal display mode). The specific display mode 3 is a display mode in which three character icons are displayed in a superimposed state. However, apparently, the character icons corresponding to the previous variation display and the previous variation display do not disappear, and the character icon corresponding to the previous variation display, the character icon corresponding to the previous variation display, and the current variation It seems that the character icons corresponding to the display are displayed side by side in the changing image display area 720.

As shown in (E) in the figure, immediately after the changing image Hb3 is displayed in the changing image display area 720, a plurality of character icons are completely destroyed, and the display mode of the changing image Hb3 is a special display mode 3 (characters). A pending change effect that changes to the C icon) is generated, and N + 3rd variation display is started.

In this suppression chance mode, when a trigger hold (big hit hold) that becomes a big hit occurs and the type of the big hit is "2R normal big hit", even if the hold change look-ahead lottery is won, the hold image The display mode of Ha or the changing image Hb may be configured so as not to change to the display mode (character C icon) with a high degree of expectation (however, even when the trigger hold is released and the hold is held, the hold image is highly expected. It is desirable to have a configuration that does not change the display mode of the degree). The reason is that even though the display mode of the reserved image Ha or the changing image Hb has changed to the display mode with high expectation (for example, the character C icon), the change display is defeated by the battle effect "2R". The reason why it is a "normal big hit" is that the player's willingness to play is reduced and the player's distrust of the pending change effect becomes stronger. To put it the other way around, in the suppression chance mode, when a hold that becomes a big hit occurs, only when the type of the big hit is "16R specific big hit", by winning the hold change look-ahead lottery, the hold image Ha or change It is preferable that the display mode of the medium image Hb can be changed to a display mode (character C icon) with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, in this suppression chance mode, if the display mode of the changing image Hb changes to the display mode (character C icon) with high expectation at the start of the fluctuation display (at least before the reach is established), the SP reach (battle). When it develops into (directing), it is confirmed that the "16 specific jackpot" has been won. Here, in the normal mode as well as in the suppression chance mode, in the case of "4R probability variation jackpot", the display mode of the reserved image HA or the changing image HB becomes the display mode (gold icon, rainbow icon) with high expectation. On the other hand, in the case of "4R normal jackpot", the display mode of the reserved image HA or the changing image HB may be configured so as not to change to the display mode (gold icon, rainbow icon) with high expectation.

<Transformation example of pending change production 1: Pillar of fire icon>
Next, a modification 1 of the pending change effect of the present embodiment will be described. Modification 1 basically has the same configuration as that of the present embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration, and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained.

In this modification, as the display mode of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode, a special display mode is set in addition to the above-mentioned normal display mode and special display mode. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the reserved image and the changing image in the first modification.

The normal display mode and the special display mode in this modification are the same as the normal display mode and the special display mode in the above-described embodiment. That is, the normal display mode is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is white. The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is red. The special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is gold. The special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape, and the display color of the icon is rainbow color.

The special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a pillar of fire weak icon imitating a small pillar of fire. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a pillar of fire icon imitating a medium-sized pillar of fire. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a pillar of fire icon that imitates a large pillar of fire. In this modification, the "pillar of fire icon", "pillar of fire icon", and "pillar of fire icon" are collectively referred to as "pillar of fire icon".

In this modification, there are cases where a special display mode appears as an initial display mode (display mode when the hold image HA occurs) and a case where a special display mode appears as a display mode after the hold change of the hold image HA. be. When the reserved image HA is displayed in the special display mode, the display mode is as if the pillar of fire icon hides the round icon, and the display mode of the pillar of fire icon is until the start of the variable display or the time when the reach is established. Is continuously displayed as a special display mode. Unlike the normal display mode and the special display mode, this special display mode is not displayed until the end of the variable display (it does not become the final display mode), and is at the start of the variable display or the reach is established. It can be said that it is an intermediate display mode that changes to another display mode (special display mode) at times. As a modification, a reserved image (fire column image) different from the reserved image HA is prepared, and the fire column image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the reserved image HA, so that the two reserved images (fire column image and the reserved image) are superimposed and displayed. HA) may be configured to be displayed as a composite reserved image. In that case, the fire column image (fire column icon) does not have to hide the reserved image HA (round icon) to the extent that it is completely invisible, and the outline of the reserved image HA (round icon) or one of them. Only the part may be concealed to the extent that it can be visually recognized (at least, it is preferable that the display color of the round icon is concealed to an indistinguishable degree).

In this modification, when the display mode of the changing image HB changes from the special display mode to another display mode (when the pillar icon disappears) at the start of the variable display or when the reach is established, the changing image A pending change fanning effect is performed to fuel whether or not the display mode of the HB changes to the special display mode. Specifically, the hold change fanning effect changes to a white icon (normal display mode) or a blue or higher icon (special display mode) after the flame of the pillar of fire icon becomes stronger for a moment and disappears. It is a production that incites. The types of this pending change fanning effect include a failure effect that changes from the fire pillar icon (special display mode) to a white icon (normal display mode), and a blue or higher icon (special display mode) from the fire pillar icon (special display mode). There is a changing success production. In this modification, as a plurality of types of special display modes, "special display mode 1 (pillar of fire small weak icon)" <"special display mode 2 (pillar of fire icon)" <"special display mode 3 (pillar of fire strong icon)" There is a high possibility that the display mode of the changing image HB will change to a special display mode with a high degree of expectation, one step at a time.

Next, the relationship between the decorative pattern on the screen and the reserved image HA (changing image HB) will be described. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram conceptually showing the layer structure of the staging display device 70 in this modification. (A) in the figure shows the layer structure during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and (B) in the figure shows the layer structure during the stop display of the decorative symbol. The “layer” means each layer of the hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image constituting the whole image. In this modification, the background image layer R101, the decorative pattern layers R102 to R104, the reserved image HA (including the changing image HB) layer R105, and the like are displayed on the screen in a superposed state. The higher the display priority, the higher the layer (front side when viewed from the player), and the lower the display priority, the lower layer (rear side when viewed from the player). Will be done. The decorative symbol layers R102 to R104 include a left symbol layer R102, a right symbol layer R103, and a middle symbol layer R104, but these may be collectively the same layer. Further, in this modification, the layer of the reserved image HA and the layer of the changing image HB are configured by a common layer R105, but the layer of the reserved image HA and the layer of the changing image HB are separated from each other. It may be configured, or the layers of the four reserved image HAs may be configured as separate layers.

Here, the special display mode (pillar of fire icon) is formed to have a relatively large display size as compared with other display modes (round icons), and is in front of and behind the decorative symbol during variable display or stop display. Can be superimposed and displayed. That is, the pillar of fire icon and the decorative symbol may be displayed in a state of being covered back and forth on the screen during the variable display or the stop display of the decorative symbol. Note that the term "stop display of decorative symbol" used here is used in the concept of including "fixed stop display" of the decorative symbol but not "temporary stop display" (that is, temporary stop display during pseudo-continuous production). Is a concept included in "variable display"). In the present embodiment, the display priority of the decorative symbol layers R102 to R104 and the reserved image HA layer R105 is switched depending on whether the decorative symbol is in the variable display or the stop display. Specifically, when the change start command from the main control board 100 is received, the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are preferentially displayed over the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The layer R105 of the reserved image HA is assigned higher than the layers R102 to R104 of the decorative pattern. The reason is that "decorative stop display of decorative symbols" is not "variable display of decorative symbols", which is a situation in which a definite hit / fail judgment result is notified by clearly notifying the player of the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols. In the situation of "inside and temporary stop display", even if the identification display (number) of the decorative symbol cannot be clearly seen, the player is informed that the variable display is in progress or the temporary stop display is in progress (sway fluctuation, etc.). It suffices if it can be notified, and this is to prevent the hold image HA (pillar hold) from being hidden by the scroll display up and down of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, when the variable stop command from the main control board 100 is received, the decorative symbol is displayed preferentially over the reserved image HA and the variable image HB during the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol, so that the reserved image is displayed. Layers R102 to R104 of the decorative pattern are assigned higher than the layer R105 of HA. The reason is that during the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol, the player is clearly notified of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol as described above (visualization of the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol by the reserved image HA or the like). This is to prevent the sex from deteriorating). The layer R101 of the background image is always arranged below the layers R102 to R104 of the decorative pattern and the layer R105 of the reserved image HA. As a further modification of the first modification, the decorative symbol is preferentially displayed over the reserved image HA and the changing image HB even during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, as in the case of the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, the layers R102 to R104 of the decorative pattern may be assigned higher than the layer R105 of the reserved image HA. Further, in the first modification, the specification for switching the above display priority including the further modification for the special display mode (pillar of fire icon) is adopted, but other display modes (round icon) are also adopted. If it is superimposed on the decorative symbol during the stop display, the above-mentioned display priority switching specification including a further modification similar to the special display mode (pillar of fire icon) may be adopted. In addition, in the normal mode, the above-mentioned specification for switching the display priority including a further modification is applied, while in the other mode (for example, the suppression chance mode), the superimposed display is not performed. As a result, the above-mentioned specification for switching the display priority including further modification is not adopted, or even if the superimposed display is performed, the decorative pattern is preferentially displayed or the reserved image and the changing image are preferentially displayed. It may be configured not to adopt the above-mentioned specification for switching the display priority including the modification example.

Subsequently, an example of the effect of the pending change effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing an effect example of the hold change effect in the first modification.

As shown in (A) in the figure, during the execution of a certain variation display (Nth variation display), a new operation hold ball of the first special symbol is generated by the start winning, and this operation hold ball (trigger hold). ) By winning the hold change look-ahead lottery, the second hold image HA2 corresponding to the hold order is displayed. In the figure, the first reserved image is "HA1" and the second reserved image (reserved image of trigger hold) is "HA2" according to the entry order of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol at this time. In addition to being represented by, the changing image that is the target of the variable display is represented by "HB0". The reserved images HA1 to HA2 and the changing image HB0 are all displayed in the normal display mode (white icon).

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the Nth variation display is completed, the earliest reserved image HA1 is digested to shift to the variable display area 720 and switch to the variable image HB1 and each hold. The image HA2 shifts to the left, and the next fluctuation display (N + 1th fluctuation display) is started. At this time, is the display mode of the hold image HA2 related to the trigger hold changed from the normal display mode (white icon) to the special display mode 2 (icon in the pillar of fire), and is the white icon hidden by the icon in the pillar of fire on the screen? (Displayed as if the display color of the round icon is concealed after that). During the variable display of the decorative symbol (including at the start of the fluctuation), the reserved image HA2 and the variable image HB1 are preferentially displayed over the decorative symbol, and the display mode of the reserved image HA2 and the variable image HB1 and the reserved image HB1 are displayed. The state of change can be clearly seen by the player.

As shown in (C) in the figure, the N + second variation display ends, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed with priority over the reserved image HA2 and the changing image HB1, so that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol can be clearly visually recognized.

As shown in (D) in the figure, when the earliest reserved image (pending image related to trigger holding) HA2 is digested, the image is shifted to the changing image display area 720 and switched to the changing image HB2.

As shown in (E) in the figure, when the changing image HB2 (icon in the pillar of fire) related to the trigger hold reaches the changing image display area 720, the flame of the icon in the pillar of fire becomes stronger for a moment as a holding change fanning effect.

As shown in (F) in the figure, immediately after the hold change fanning effect is performed (immediately after the flame of the icon in the pillar of fire becomes stronger), the display mode of the changing image HB2 is from the special display mode 2 (icon in the pillar of fire). The change is made to the special display mode 3 (gold icon), and the variation display (N + second variation display) is started. At this time, on the screen, the flame of the pillar of fire icon disappears, and it seems as if the golden icon hidden behind it suddenly appeared. That is, while the icon in the pillar of fire is displayed, the white icon hidden behind the icon in the pillar of fire can be made to look as if it had already changed to the red icon. Thus, in reality, the display mode of the reserved image HA2 changes from the white icon to the fire pillar icon, and the display mode of the changing image HB2 changes from the fire pillar icon to the red icon, but behind the fire pillar icon. In, the round icon can be shown as a pseudo pending change effect as if it changed from a white icon to a red icon, and it is possible to create a novel pending change effect that has never existed before.

<Transformation example 2: motion display of hold change effect>
Next, a modification 2 of the pending change effect of the present embodiment will be described. Modification 2 basically has the same configuration as that of the present embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration, and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be explained.

In this modification, as a normal display mode of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode, a plurality of types of normal display modes according to the stay stage are provided. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the modified example 2.

In this modification, as display modes of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB, a plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3 are set according to the stay stage in the normal mode. That is, when the effect mode currently being stayed is the normal mode, the normal display mode (default display) of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is configured to be different depending on the stay stage. In this modification, as the stay stage of the normal mode, a plurality of types of normal stages (first stage, second stage, third stage) having different types of effects are set. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, when a stage transition lottery performed every predetermined variation display number of times is won), the stay stage in the normal mode is switched. The background images in this normal stage differ from each other depending on the type of stage to which the transition is made. For example, when staying in the first stage (for example, the morning stage), the "morning background image" and the second stage A "daytime background image" is displayed when staying at (for example, a daytime stage), and a "nighttime background image" is displayed when staying at a third stage (for example, a nighttime stage). Here, the selection candidates for the advance notice effect and the SP reach effect differ depending on each stage. For example, in the first stage, the advance notice effect for the ally character a and the advance notice effect for the ally character b are selected as the advance notice effect. As a candidate, SP reach A-1, B-1, C-1 in which the enemy character a appears as the SP reach effect is a selection candidate, while in the second stage, the advance notice effect regarding the ally character a is used as the advance notice effect. The advance notice effect related to the ally character c is a selection candidate, and the SP reach A-2, B-2, C-2 in which the enemy character b appears is a selection candidate as the SP reach effect, and the ally character a is used as the third stage advance notice effect. As the SP reach effect, the SP reach A-3, B-3, and C-3 in which the enemy character c appears are the selection candidates.

Here, among the plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3, the normal display mode 1 is a display mode corresponding to the first stage, and the normal display mode 2 is a display mode corresponding to the second stage, which is a normal display mode. Reference numeral 3 is a display mode corresponding to the third stage. The normal display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a round icon imitating a round shape. The normal display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a flag icon imitating a flag. The normal display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a heart icon imitating a heart.

The special display modes 1 to 5 are display modes common to all stages regardless of the stage currently being stayed. Here, the special display mode 1 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is blue. The special display mode 2 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is green. The special display mode 3 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is red. The special display mode 4 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is gold. The special display mode 5 is a display mode in which the shape of the image is a rhombus icon imitating a rhombus, and the display color of the icon is a rainbow color. As a further modification, for the blue icon / green icon having a relatively low expectation of big hit, the display mode corresponds to each stage (specifically, the display color of the image shape of the normal display modes 1 to 3 is used. The red icon / golden icon / rainbow-colored icon, which has a relatively low expectation of a big hit, may be a special display mode 3 to 5 common to all stages.

In this modification, when the display mode of the hold image HA or the changing image HB is the normal display mode, a motion effect for displaying the hold image HA or the changing image HB in motion (also referred to as “motion display”) is executed. Will be done. The image control board 300 stores moving image data for displaying the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in operation. The reproduction time of this moving image data is 2 seconds, and it is video data recording continuous operation from the first image to the final image. Then, by repeatedly playing back (loop playing) the moving image data for 2 seconds, a motion effect is performed in which the reserved image or the changing image repeats a predetermined motion display (motion display). In this modification, the movement of the reserved image HA between the image display areas due to the reserved digestion is called "shift", and the reserved image HA itself or the changing image HB itself operates in each image display area. Doing so is called "motion". However, the reserved image HA or the changing image HB may operate beyond each image display area, and the adjacent reserved image HAs or the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are at least a part thereof. In, the display mode may be superimposed on the front and back.

FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram for explaining the motion effect of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the second modification. In the motion effect, one cycle is from the start to the end of each icon (until the series of actions from the beginning to the end of the predetermined action is completed), and the motion display of such a cycle is repeated. It is a production. In this modification, motion patterns having different operation modes are set according to the types of normal display modes 1 to 3. A series of motion patterns in which the circle icon expands and contracts up and down is set in the circle icon (normal display mode 1). In the flag icon (normal display mode 2), a series of motion patterns in which the flag cloth portion of the flag icon flutters in the wind is set. A series of motion patterns in which the heart icon rotates around the central axis are set in the heart icon (normal display mode 3). In this modification, "2 seconds" is set as the motion display cycle (that is, the reproduction time of the moving image data) in any of the icons (normal display modes 1 to 3), and this "2 seconds" is set as one cycle. Motion display is executed repeatedly. Here, also in the special display modes 1 to 5, the predetermined motion display may be repeatedly executed with "2 seconds" as one cycle, or the display mode is further differentiated from the normal display modes 1 to 3. Therefore, a predetermined motion display may be repeatedly executed with "1 second" as one cycle. As another modification, the special display modes 1 to 5 may be configured so that motion display is not performed. As a further modification, the cycle of the operation display of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB may be substantially the same as the cycle of the variable display of the decorative symbol (the cycle of one scroll display). Further, in the present embodiment, the operation display cycle (2 seconds) of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB in the normal mode is set to the shortest time of the variable display time in the normal mode (basic variable time 3 seconds + variable additional time 0 seconds). = 3 seconds), and the hold image HA and the changing image HB are configured to display the operation for at least one cycle regardless of which main fluctuation pattern or main fluctuation addition pattern is selected. However, the cycle of the operation display of the reserved image HA and the variable image HB in the normal mode may be substantially the same as the shortest time of the variable display time in the normal mode, or the reserved image HA and the variable in the normal mode may be matched. The operation display cycle of the medium image HB may be set to be longer than the shortest time of the fluctuation display time in the normal mode.

In the normal display modes 1 to 3, the reference motion posture (the first image of the moving image data) that is the starting point of each motion display is set. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the motion display is started from this reference motion posture as a starting point, and the motion display is restarted from the reference motion posture every time a predetermined cycle (2 seconds) is reached (loop playback is performed). Ru). On the other hand, the motion display of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is forcibly terminated when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends. Then, when the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are switched to the reference motion posture, and the motion display is started (loop playback is performed) starting from this reference motion posture. Ru). When a new reserved image HA is displayed, the motion display is started starting from the reference motion posture regardless of the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB. That is, the motion display of the new reserved image HA and the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB are mutually different from each other, except when the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB are in the reference motion posture. They are not synchronized and the movement postures of each other are different. However, the motion display of the new reserved image HA and the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB will be synchronized with each other when the next variable display is started. In this modification, "synchronization" of the motion display means that the timing of the reference motion posture in the motion display of each of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is the same timing. That is, on the premise that the operation cycle of each hold image HA and the changing image HB is the same, each hold image HA and the changing image HB can take the same operation posture at any timing during motion display. be.

Subsequently, an example of the motion effect of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB will be described. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the motion effect in the second modification. In this effect example, the effect stage is the third stage, and the hold image HA corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and the changing image HB corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol are displayed. To.

As shown in (A) in the figure, the reserved images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are motion-displayed with the reference motion posture as the starting point, triggered by the start of the variation display (Nth variation display) of the decorative symbol. To start. In the figure, the first reserved image is represented by "HA1" and the second reserved image is represented by "HA2" according to the entry order of the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol at this time, and the variation thereof. The changing image to be displayed is represented by "HB0".

As shown in (B) in the figure, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, a motion display is performed in which the reserved images HA1 and HB2 and the changing image HB0 rotate around their own central axis. At this time, the motion displays of the reserved images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are synchronized with each other (the same operation mode is used). In the figure (B), the reserved images HA1 and HB1 and the changing image HB0 are shown in a state of being rotated 90 degrees from the reference operating posture.

As shown in (C) in the figure, when a new operation holding ball of the first special symbol is generated, the third holding image (new holding image) HA3 corresponding to the holding order is in the reference operating posture. Appear. At this time, the existing reserved images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are displaced to the operating posture rotated by about 180 degrees with respect to the reference operating posture. Therefore, the motion display of the new reserved image HA3 is started in an asynchronous state (a state in which the operating posture is deviated) with respect to the motion display of the existing reserved images HA1 and HA2.

As shown in (D) in the figure, the new reserved image HA3 rotates around its own central axis while taking an operating posture shifted by about 180 degrees with respect to the existing reserved images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0. Perform motion display.

As shown in (E) in the figure, the motion display of the reserved images HA1 to HA3 and the changing image HB0 is forcibly stopped when the variable display of the decorative symbol this time ends. In the figure (E), the reserved images HA1 and HA2 and the changing image HB0 are forcibly stopped in an operating posture rotated about 90 degrees from the reference operating posture, and the reserved image HA3 is rotated about 270 degrees from the reference operating posture. It shows the state of being forcibly stopped in the operating posture.

As shown in (F) in the figure, with the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the earliest reserved image HA1 shifts to the variable image display area 720 while maintaining the forced stop posture, and the variable image HB1 At the same time, the subsequent reserved images HA2 and HA3 shift to the left while maintaining the forced stop posture.

As shown in (G) in the figure, the reserved images HA2 and HB3 and the changing image HB1 are switched to the reference motion posture when the next variation display of the decorative symbol (N + 1th variation display) is started. The motion display is started from this reference motion posture as a starting point. That is, the motion display of the reserved image HA3 and the motion display of the reserved image HA2 and the changing image HB1 are synchronized with each other when the variable display is started.

As shown in (H) in the figure, the motion display of each of the reserved images HA2 and HA3 and the changing image HB1 is set to 2 seconds as one cycle until the variation display of the decorative symbol (N + 1th variation display) is completed. It is displayed repeatedly.

In the above-mentioned second modification, when a new reserved image is displayed due to the start winning, the motion display of the new reserved image HA is not synchronized with the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB. It was a configuration performed in the form (except when the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB are in the reference operating posture), but it is not limited to this configuration, and a new reserved image is created by the start prize. Is displayed, the motion display of the new reserved image HA may be performed in synchronization with the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB. In that case, as a method of synchronizing each motion display, the following two methods (1) and (2) can be mentioned. (1) By making a new reserved image HA appear in the same motion posture as the current motion posture of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB, and starting the motion display of the new reserved image HA, the existing reserved image HA is started. Synchronize with the motion display of the pending image HA and the changing image HB. (2) After the new reserved image HA appears in the reference operating posture, the operating posture of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB becomes the reference operating posture (that is, the existing reserved image HA and the existing reserved image HA and When the motion display for one cycle of the changing image HB is completed), the motion display of the new reserved image HA is started to synchronize with the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB.

Further, in the above-mentioned second modification, the motion display of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is started when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished. The configuration was such that the motion display of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB was terminated (forced stop), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the motion display of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is changed in the decorative symbol. It may be configured to be continuously executed regardless of the start and end of the display. That is, the motion display of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is continued without being terminated (forced stop) when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the motion display is displayed between the variable displays of the decorative symbol each time. It may be configured to connect continuously (seamlessly) without interruption. In that case, when a new reserved image HA is displayed due to the start winning, the motion display of the new reserved image HA is started in synchronization with the motion display of the existing reserved image HA and the changing image HB. Is preferable. At that time, the method of synchronizing the motion displays is the same as the above-mentioned two methods (1) and (2). Further, when the motion display of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is continued regardless of the start and end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reserved image HA is also shifted to the left side due to the pending digestion. It is preferable to continue the motion display of HA. However, the motion display of the hold image HA may be stopped only while the hold image HA is shifted to the left due to the hold digestion, and the motion display may be restarted after the hold image HA is shifted.

Further, in the above-mentioned second modification, the motion display is performed when the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode in all the normal stages, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. When staying in a predetermined normal stage among a plurality of normal stages, the motion display of the hold image HA and the changing image HB is not performed even if the holding image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode. It may be configured as. That is, among a plurality of types of normal display modes 1 to 3, a normal display mode in which motion display is not performed may be set. In the normal display mode in which the motion display is not performed, instead of performing the motion display, the light emission display (for example, the pending image HA and the changing image HB are blinking) is configured to be displayed in the same cycle as the operation cycle of the other motion display. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned second modification, the motion display is performed only when the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are in the normal display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the reserved image HA is not limited to this configuration. And even when the changing image HB is in the special display mode (or only when the reserved image HA and the changing image HB are in the special display mode), the motion display may be configured. Further, in the above-mentioned second modification, the special display mode of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is configured as a display mode common to each normal stage, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the reserved image HA and the variable display mode are configured. The special display mode of the medium image HB may be configured as a different display mode depending on the type of stay stage. Further, one image of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB may be displayed in motion so that the other image of the reserved image HA and the changing image HB is not displayed in motion. Further, when a hold occurs, a hold occurrence display may be provided, which is an effect of gradually appearing from a situation where the hold image does not exist, and the hold occurrence display is displayed from the start to the end (the appearance start of the hold image). It is desirable to set, for example, 0.3 seconds from (to) until the entire image is displayed), and to set the effect time to be shorter than that of the motion display. In addition, when a new hold occurrence display is performed due to a new hold occurrence during the hold occurrence display related to a certain hold image, the previous hold occurrence display is not forcibly terminated, and the previous hold occurrence display and the subsequent hold occurrence display are performed. The (new) pending occurrence display of is performed in parallel. In addition, when the hold image is shifted to the left due to the hold digestion, the hold image is moved from the current position (the position before the shift display) to the position after the move (the position after the shift display). A certain shift display effect may be provided, for example, the shift display effect is set to 0.7 seconds, which is a shorter effect time than the motion display and a longer effect time than the hold occurrence display. Is desirable. This shift display effect can be performed in parallel with the hold occurrence display when the hold occurrence timing and the hold digestion timing are substantially the same timing. In addition, when the hold image is shifted (moved) in the shift display effect, the motion display of the hold image is stopped, and the hold image is fixedly displayed in the reference operation posture during the shift display from the start of the shift display. Therefore, after the shift display (after the shift display effect is completed), the motion display may be restarted from the reference motion posture.

[Battle production / Meter production]
Next, the "battle effect" and the "meter effect" will be described as characteristic effects executed when the effect mode is the phantom fight rush mode.

<Battle production>
As described above, the battle effect is an effect of notifying the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol and the type of the jackpot according to the result (win / loss) of the ally character playing against the enemy character. In the present embodiment, when the effect mode currently being executed is the phantom fight rush mode, if the variable display develops into SP reach, a battle effect in which the ally character fights against the enemy character is developed as the reach effect. Then, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning is confirmed when the battle production occurs (when it develops into SP reach), and either "specific jackpot" or "normal jackpot" is determined according to the result (win / loss) of this battle production. It is intended to suggest or notify whether or not the winner has been won.

First, the production flow of the battle effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing an effect flow of the battle effect in the present embodiment. In the figure, the basic flow of battle production is shown in chronological order from left to right on the paper.

First, as shown in FIG. 53, after the variation display is started, a step-up effect (ST101) is performed as a advance notice effect before the reach is established. The step-up effect is an advanced effect that changes the effect form step by step according to a predetermined order, and suggests or notifies the high degree of expectation of a big hit according to the number of stages in which the effect is developed. .. Of the three stage production steps (SU1, SU2, SU3), the step-up effect is the first step-up effect consisting of only the first stage effect step SU1 and the second stage effect step SU2. There are two step-up effects and a third step-up effect that develops to the third stage effect step SU3. Then, after the battle character selection effect (ST102) is performed to select the opponent of the battle effect from the plurality of enemy characters displayed on the screen, the reach fan effect (ST102) that incites whether or not the reach is established is performed. ST103) is executed. If the reach is not established (ST104) after the reach fanning effect (ST103) is performed, it is determined that the result is "off", and the variable display ends as it is (ST105). On the other hand, when the reach is established and develops into SP reach, it is confirmed that it will be a "big hit" at that point, and after that, a battle production will be developed in which the ally character will play against the enemy character (enemy character selected by the player). (ST106 to ST128).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of production routes 1 to 5 are prepared as production routes for battle production, and the outcome of the battle production is derived via different production processes for each production route. Roughly speaking, the production route 1 is a route for a normal jackpot where the result of the battle production is "defeat", and the production routes 2 to 5 are routes for a specific jackpot where the result of the battle production is "victory". .. In this embodiment, in any of the production routes 1 to 5, the result of the battle effect is the time when the effect of the ally character attacking the enemy character appears (when the ally attack effect described later occurs). It is a specification that confirms that it will be a "win" (winning a specific jackpot).

At the branch point of each of the effect routes 1 to 5, a branch effect is performed that suggests which of the plurality of types of effect routes 1 to 5 the effect route is to progress to. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of branching effects, branching effect 1 (preemptive fanning effect: ST107), branching effect 2 (enemy preemptive fanning effect: ST112), branching effect 3 (enemy attack avoidance fanning effect: ST119), and branching effect. 4 (Character fanning effect: ST125) is set.

Branching effect 1 (preemptive fanning effect: ST107) shifts to "directing route 2", which is the route for the ally character to perform the first strike by instigating whether the first strike is to be a ally character or an enemy character. It is a production that suggests whether to move to "Production Route 1, 3, 4, 5", which is the route for the enemy character to make the first strike.

Branching effect 2 (enemy first strike production: ST112) will shift to "directing route 3" where the first strike will be a single blow by inciting whether the enemy character's first strike will be a single blow or a continuous hit. , It is a production that suggests whether the first strike will shift to "Production Route 1, 4, 5", which is a route that will be repeated.

Branching effect 3 (enemy attack avoidance fanning effect: ST119) shifts to "effecting route 4", which is a route that succeeds in avoiding, by fanning whether or not the enemy character's attack can be avoided, or avoids it. It is a production that suggests whether to shift to "Production Routes 1 and 5", which is a route that fails.

Branching effect 4 (role effect: ST125) shifts to "effect route 5", which is a route that succeeds in the appearance of the character, by inciting whether or not the character appears on the front of the screen. It is a production that suggests whether to shift to "Production Route 1", which is a route that fails to appear.

Therefore, the staging route 1 goes through four branch staging, the staging route 2 goes through one branch staging, the staging route 3 goes through two branch staging, and the staging route 4 goes through three branch staging. The staging route 5 goes through four branch staging. Therefore, all the production routes 1 to 5 are routes that go through at least one branch production.

Specifically, the production route 1 is a battle start production (ST106) → a preemptive fanning effect (ST107) → an enemy preemptive fanning effect (ST112) → an enemy attack continuous hitting effect (ST118) → an enemy attack avoiding fanning effect (ST119) → an enemy attack. The production progresses in the flow of avoidance failure production (ST124) → character fanning production (ST125) → defeat production (ST128).

The production route 2 is produced in the flow of battle start production (ST106) → preemptive fanning production (ST107) → ally preemptive production (ST108) → ally attack production (ST109) → character movable production (ST110) → victory production (ST111). Progress.

The production route 3 is the battle start production (ST106) → preemptive fanning effect (ST107) → enemy preemptive fanning effect (ST112) → enemy attack continuous hitting effect (ST113) → enemy attack avoidance effect (ST114) → ally attack effect (ST115) → The production progresses in the flow of the character movable production (ST116) → the victory production (ST117).

The production route 4 is the battle start production (ST106) → preemptive fanning effect (ST107) → enemy preemptive fanning effect (ST112) → enemy attack continuous hitting effect (ST118) → enemy attack avoidance fanning effect (ST119) → enemy attack avoidance successful effect (ST119) The production progresses in the flow of ST120) → ally attack production (ST121) → character movable production (ST122) → victory production (ST123).

The production route 5 is the battle start production (ST106) → preemptive fanning effect (ST107) → enemy preemptive fanning effect (ST112) → enemy attack continuous hitting effect (ST118) → enemy attack avoidance fanning effect (ST119) → enemy attack avoidance failure effect (ST119) ST124)-> character fanning effect (ST125)-> character movable effect (ST126)-> victory effect (ST127).

Here, the winning effect (ST111, ST117, ST123, ST127) means an effect that deterministically notifies that the result of the battle effect is a victory (winning a "specific jackpot"). Further, the defeat effect (ST128) means an effect that deterministically notifies that the result of the battle effect is defeat (winning a "normal jackpot").

<Meter production>
Subsequently, the meter effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 (A) is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of meter staging. In the present embodiment, when the effect mode is the illusionary rush mode, basically, the meter effect is executed in all the fluctuation displays during the stay in this illusionary rush mode. This meter effect is an effect of changing the level (also referred to as "meter value") of the meter image displayed on the screen during the execution of the fluctuation display. The meter image is displayed in the meter display area 740 on the left side of the screen, and is, for example, a vertically long image showing a level from "1" to "10". The meter effect is performed in each variation display unit (execution of the meter effect is started at the start of each variation display, and execution of the meter effect ends when the variation display of each time is stopped). The level of the meter image is cleared (reset) to zero at the beginning of each variation display or at the end of the variation display. In the present embodiment, when the level of the meter image reaches MAX (10th stage), it is confirmed and notified that the result of the battle effect is victory. Therefore, the level of the meter image can be said to be an index showing the degree of expectation (probability change expectation) that the result of the battle production will be a victory.

In the present embodiment, a meter counter as a counting means for controlling the level (meter value) of the meter image is provided. The count value of this meter counter is an internal numerical value (referred to as "internal numerical value") corresponding to the level (meter value) of the meter image, and this internal numerical value can be updated in units of "1". .. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), each time the internal value of the meter counter increases by "10", the level of the meter image is associated with increasing by "one step". Therefore, when the internal value increases to the maximum value (100), the level of the meter image reaches MAX (10th step). The internal value of this meter counter is cleared (reset) to zero at the start of each fluctuation display or at the end of the fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 53, the internal numerical value of the meter counter can be increased / decreased at a plurality of timings T1 to T7 set during the fluctuation display. Of these plurality of timings T1 to T7, the timing T1 is the timing before the reach is established, and the timings T2 to T7 are the timings after the reach is established (after the battle is developed). Specifically, the timing T1 is the timing during the period during which the step-up notice effect (ST101) is being executed. The timing T2 is the timing during the period during which the battle start effect (ST106) is being executed. The timing T3 is the timing during the period during which the enemy preemptive staging effect (ST112) is being executed. The timing T4 is the timing during the period during which the enemy attack avoidance fanning effect (ST124) is being executed. Timings T5, T6, and T7 are timings during the period during which the ally attack effect (ST109, ST115, ST121) is being executed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the upper limit of the internal numerical value of the meter counter is set for each of the timings T1 to T7. That is, the upper limit value of the internal numerical value is the limit value of the internal numerical value that can be taken until each timing T1 to T7 is completed. Therefore, the internal value of the meter counter does not increase beyond the upper limit value assigned to the timings T1 to T7 during the current stay, and is within the upper limit until each timing T1 to T7 ends. Only the increase in is allowed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the internal numerical value is "20" for timing T1, "40" for timing T2, "60" for timing T3, and "100" for timing T4, T5, T6, and T7. Each is assigned, and basically, the upper limit value becomes higher toward the later timings T1 to T7 in chronological order.

Here, as described above, the maximum value (100) is set as the upper limit value of the internal numerical value in the timings T4 to T7 in the latter half. Regarding timing T4, in a scene where the battle result of the battle production is greatly influenced (a scene that is directly linked to the win) by inciting whether or not the ally character can avoid the attack of the enemy character (or whether or not it can withstand). Therefore, the internal numerical value can be reached up to the maximum value (100) on condition that the number of operations of the effect button 15 by the player reaches a predetermined number of times. In addition, since the timings T5 to T7 are the timings when the ally character attacks (the result of the battle effect is determined to be victory), the internal numerical value is forcibly set to the maximum value almost at the same time as the ally character's attack (the result of the battle effect is determined to be victory). It is designed to increase to 100). Therefore, at the timings T5 to T7, the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character and the effect that the meter image reaches the MAX level are definite effects that deterministically notify that the result of the battle effect is victory. (Specific jackpot confirmation production). As the execution timing of this confirmation effect, the timing at which the ally character attacks and the timing at which the meter image reaches the MAX level may be different, and the meter image reaches the MAX level after the ally character's attack occurs. It may be configured so that the attack of the ally character occurs after the meter image reaches the MAX level.

Further, among the plurality of timings T1 to T7, in the enemy preemptive fanning effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance fanning effect (ST124) performed at the timings T3 and T4, the predetermined effect is advanced by the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. It is configured as a button effect (operation request effect) to be performed. During the execution of the enemy preemptive fanning effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance fanning effect (ST124), the operation valid period (hereinafter referred to as "first operation valid period") in which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid is set. Has been done. During this first operation valid period, for example, a notification effect for prompting that the operation of the effect button 15 is effective or an operation input is performed on the screen or the like is performed. Then, during the execution of the enemy preemptive fanning effect (S112) and the enemy attack avoidance fanning effect (ST124), a numerical value corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 15 is added to the internal numerical value. On the other hand, the other effects (battle start effect, ally attack effect) performed at the timings T1 to T2 and T5 to T7 are non-button effects (non-operation request) in which the effect progresses even if the player does not operate the effect button 15. It is configured as a production). Therefore, during the execution of this non-button effect, a predetermined value (constant value, lottery value, etc.) is automatically added to the internal numerical value even if the player does not operate the effect button 15.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, during the period during which the meter effect is being executed, the operation of the effect button 15 can be input during all periods except the first operation valid period. A valid period (hereinafter referred to as "second operation valid period" for conceptually distinguishing from the first operation valid period) is set, but the second operation valid period is one outside the first operation valid period. It may be only a partial period (for example, only the timing of T2 and T5). This second operation valid period is different from the above-mentioned first operation valid period, and is a period during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid without explicitly prompting the player to input the operation of the effect button 15. That is, during the second operation valid period, the notification effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 15 to be effective or the operation input is not performed. As a result, during the execution period of the meter effect, the effect button by the player is operated regardless of whether the effect button 15 is operated during the first operation valid period or the effect button 15 is operated during the second operation valid period. It is possible to increase the internal value by the operation of 15 (the level of the meter image can be increased). In the following, in order to clearly distinguish between the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the first operation valid period and the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the second operation valid period, the effect performed during the first operation valid period. The operation of the button 15 is also referred to as "front button operation", and the operation of the effect button 15 performed during the second operation valid period is also referred to as "back button operation". Here, as a modification, an effect of increasing the level of the meter effect (an effect of changing the display mode of the meter effect) is generated by operating the effect button 15 in the first operation effective period, but in the second operation effective period. Even if the effect button 15 is operated, an effect that increases the level of the meter effect is not generated. For example, an effect that imitates a flame is generated around the screen, which is another effect, and the intensity of the flame is gradually reduced. You may generate a changing effect. There are 20 levels of intensity of the flame, and it is configured to suggest the possibility of shifting to a branch with a high degree of probability change expectation (if a meter effect is used even in normal mode, a big hit expectation) and a high degree of expectation depending on the stage. May be good. That is, in this modification, the effect generated based on the front button operation during the first operation valid period (front button effect) and the effect generated based on the back button operation during the second operation valid period (back button effect). However, they are configured as different effects. Further, using the same meter image, the meter display that is additionally displayed by operating the front button and the meter display that is additionally displayed by operating the back button may be displayed in different display modes (for example, the addition is displayed by operating the front button). The meter display is blue, and the meter display that is added and displayed by operating the back button is red).

In the present embodiment, when the internal numerical value of the meter counter does not reach the predetermined upper limit value assigned to each timing T1 to T7 at the end of each timing T1 to T7, the upper limit value is operated by the player by operating the back button. It is possible to complement the internal numerical values up to. That is, if the internal numerical value does not reach the upper limit value assigned to the certain timing at the end of a certain timing among the plurality of timings T1 to T9, the next timing is set up to this upper limit value. Until it arrives, the internal numerical value can be complementarily increased by operating the back button. For example, although "60" is assigned as an upper limit value to the timing T3, if the internal numerical value does not reach the upper limit value (60) by the end of the timing T3, the next timing. By operating the back button before reaching T4, the internal numerical value can be increased up to the upper limit value (60).

As a modification, if the internal value that can be increased by operating the back button is set to unlimited (however, the maximum value is limited to "100") and the back button is operated as a special case, each It may be configured so that the internal numerical value can be increased beyond the specified upper limit value set in the timings T1 to T9. That is, even before the timing (timing T6 to T9) in which the upper limit of the internal numerical value is set to the maximum value (100) arrives, the player can freely operate the back button at any timing. The level of the meter image can be reached to the MAX level (10 levels) at an early stage, and the result of the battle effect can be known quickly. As a result, the player's motivation for button operation can be further increased, and the synergistic effect of the battle effect and the meter effect can give a strong impact to the player.

Further, as a modification, the meter image may be configured to be switchable between normal display and enlarged display in the variable display during the phantom fight rush mode. At the start of the fluctuation display, the meter image is normally displayed, and before the battle development of the fluctuation display, the meter image is enlarged and displayed only at timings T1 to 3, and after the battle development in the fluctuation display is always (all timings T4 to). It is preferred that the meter image be magnified (for the entire period after SP reach, including T9).

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the effect mode in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game, the effect mode is not limited to the case where the effect mode is the phantom fight rush mode (probability change game state). It is configured so that the meter effect can be executed even in the suppression chance mode (probability variation game state, time saving game state) or revenge mode (time saving game state). Here, basically, the meter effect of the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode and the meter effect of the phantom fight rush mode have the same configuration. However, when the effect mode is the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the meter effect is executed (the meter image is displayed) when the fluctuation display develops into SP reach (battle effect). That is, when the effect mode is the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the variation display is a variation display that triggers the execution of the battle effect (that is, a variation display in which the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit). Is the execution condition of the meter effect. Then, when the fluctuation display develops into SP reach, the battle effect and the meter effect are started almost at the same time. Therefore, when the effect mode is the suppression chance mode or the revenge mode, the internal numerical value of the meter counter can be updated at the timings T2 to T7 set after the start of the battle effect among the timings T1 to T7. Further, after the start of the battle effect, it is possible to update the internal value of the meter count by operating the back button in the same manner as described above. On the other hand, before developing into a battle effect, the back button operation is treated as invalid (the second operation valid period is not set before developing into a battle effect).

Further, as a modification, SP reach D may be generated even in the normal mode, and the same battle effect and meter effect may be executed. In that case, it is expected to develop into SP reach D after executing a pseudo-continuous effect or a special effect in the present embodiment and each modification, or displaying a hold image or a changing image including a hold change effect. It may be configured. In such a configuration, winning the battle effect in the normal mode does not need to determine the probabilistic jackpot, but merely indicates that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, with respect to the meter effect, the level may be an index of the jackpot expectation degree, not an index of the probability change expectation degree.

[Base control production]
Next, the base suppression effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing an effect flow of the suppression chance mode, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of the base suppression effect. In the base suppression effect, when the effect mode currently being executed is the suppression chance mode, there is a possibility that the suppression chance mode (high base state) will continue depending on whether or not the predetermined display value reaches the target value. It is a production that suggests.

The execution period of the suppression chance mode is divided into a plurality of effect sections according to the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed. Specifically, the first production section is set from the first rotation to the 20th rotation, and the second production section is set from the 21st rotation to the 40th rotation, counting from immediately after entering the suppression chance mode. The third effect section is set from the 41st rotation to the 60th rotation, and the fourth effect section is set after the 61st rotation (from the 61st rotation to the occurrence of the next big hit). In the present embodiment, the number of stays in each effect section (excluding the fourth effect section) is set to "20 times" as the number of variations of the special symbol, but each effect section (excluding the fourth effect section). The number of stays may be set to different times.

Here, the first staging section is an staging section in which an image in which a ally character stays at the first base is displayed (a staging section with the first base as a background image). The second staging section is an staging section in which an image in which a ally character stays at the second base is displayed (a staging section with the second base as a background image). The third effect section is an effect section in which an image of a ally character staying at the third base is displayed (an effect section with the third base as a background image). The fourth staging section is an staging section in which an image in which a ally character stays at the fourth base is displayed (a staging section with the fourth base as a background image).

In the fluctuation display of the final episode (20th, 40th, 60th) of each production section, the base branch suggests whether to move to the next production section (whether the suppression chance mode continues). The production is executed. In the present embodiment, the base branching effect is executed when the variation display of the final round of each effect section is a variation display that is "off". If the fluctuation display of the final round of each production section is a fluctuation display that is a "big hit", the battle production will be performed by shifting from the base currently staying to the central base (details will be described later). In the following, for convenience, the base branching effect of the first production section is referred to as "first base branching effect", the base branching effect of the second production section is referred to as "second base branching effect", and the base branching effect of the third production section is referred to as "first". Also called "three-base branch production". Each base branching effect is a production that encourages whether or not an ally character can break through the final door installed at the base where he is currently staying. If the ally character can break through the final door, it will succeed in moving to the next base (next production section), and it is suggested that the suppression chance mode (high base state) will continue. On the other hand, if the ally character cannot break through the final door, it is suggested that the transition to the next base (next production section) fails and the suppression chance mode (high base state) ends.

In the variation display except for the final round (20th rotation, 40th rotation, 60th rotation) of each effect section, the base suppression effect of adding or subtracting a predetermined value is executed. That is, this base suppression effect is performed on the 1st to 19th rotations of the 1st effect section, the 21st to 39th rotations of the 2nd effect section, and the 41st to 59th rotations of the 3rd effect section. In the following, for convenience, the base suppression effect of the first production section is referred to as "first base suppression effect", the base suppression effect of the second production section is referred to as "second base suppression effect", and the base suppression effect of the third production section is referred to as "first". The "three-base suppression production" and the base suppression production in the fourth production section are also referred to as "fourth base suppression production".

The base suppression effect is an effect of subtracting the remaining number (predetermined numerical value) of the small fish characters (enemy characters whose relative rank is lower) hiding in the base currently staying toward the target value.
In this embodiment, "0" is set as the target value of the remaining number of small fish characters. During the execution of the base suppression effect, as shown in FIG. 57, the remaining number of small fish characters (“500” in the illustrated example) is always displayed in the remaining number display area 751 on the screen. The remaining number of small fish characters is collectively subtracted at the end of each variation display. However, when staying in the 4th production section (4th base), the remaining number of enemy characters is always fixed at "0" (the remaining number is not added or subtracted). Further, in the remaining number display area 752 on the screen, the remaining number of times in the suppression chance mode (“15 times” in the illustrated example) is displayed. However, this remaining number of times is counted down with the initial value set to "20 times" at the start of each production section, and when it is the true remaining number of times (when the suppression chance mode ends after 20 rotations), There is a case where it is a false remaining number of times (a case where the suppression chance mode continues even after 20 rotations). Then, when the remaining number of times reaches "0 times" (that is, when the final round of each production section is reached), a base branching effect suggesting whether or not the next base can be transferred is performed. Further, in the map display area 753 on the screen, the layout of each base, the position of the base currently staying, and the like are displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of maps are prepared, and the types of maps are determined by a staging lottery performed at the time of entering the suppression chance mode. Depending on the type of this map, the difficulty level of each base (that is, the number of times the suppression Chan mode is continued) is suggested.

In the present embodiment, when the remaining number of small fish characters reaches the target value in each production section, the base currently being stayed is suppressed (it is definite to move to the next base). In other words, when the remaining number of small fish characters reaches the target value, it is confirmed that the base branching effect will be a successful effect in the final variation display in the current effect section (the continuation of the suppression chance mode is confirmed). Therefore, the closer the remaining number of small fish characters is to the target value, the higher the expectation that the base branching effect performed at the final round of each base will be successful.

Here, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram used for explaining the base suppression effect table (progress pattern). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of base suppression effect tables 0 to 19 are set, and one of the base suppression effect tables is set according to the type of jackpot (symbol group) that triggered the transition to the suppression chance mode. Is selected by lottery.

In the column of "base suppression effect table" in the figure, the number of the base suppression effect table is shown. In this embodiment, the "initial value", "progress pattern", "cumulative upper limit value", etc., which will be described later, are defined for each type (number) of the base suppression effect table. The "initial value" in the figure means the initial value (initial value displayed at the start of the effect section) of the remaining number of enemy characters. Any one of "999", "500", "100", and "0" is set as this initial value, and the smaller the initial value, the more the remaining number of enemy characters reaches the target value. Expectations are high.

Further, in the "progress pattern" column in the figure, in the first production section (1st to 19th rotations), the second production section (21st to 39th rotations), and the third production section (41st to 59th rotations). In each variation display, the upper limit of the number of people that can be subtracted from the remaining number of small fish characters (number of people to be subtracted) is shown. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value (maximum value) of the number of subtracted small fish characters is set for each variation display (the upper limit value cannot be exceeded and subtraction is not possible). Any one of "110", "50", "15", and "0" is set as the upper limit of the number of subtracted people. Although not shown in the present embodiment, the lower limit of the number of subtracted people is set in addition to the upper limit of the number of people to be subtracted. Specifically, a lower limit value "100" corresponding to the upper limit value "110", a lower limit value "45" corresponding to the upper limit value "50", and a lower limit value "10" corresponding to the upper limit value "15" are set respectively. ing. Therefore, the combination of the upper limit value and the lower limit value defines the range (subtraction allowable range) in which the enemy character can be subtracted during each variation display. That is, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of enemy characters can be subtracted within the subtraction allowable range of any one of "100 to 110", "45 to 50", and "10 to 15". In the present embodiment, the subtraction number of enemy characters is determined by lottery within the above subtraction range. For example, when the subtraction allowance range is set to "10 to 15", the subtraction number is among "10", "11", "12", "13", "14", and "15". One of them is determined by lottery, and the subtracted number is subtracted from the remaining number of enemy characters at the end of the variation display.

Further, the "cumulative upper limit value" in the figure means a total value obtained by adding the upper limit values of the subtracted number of people assigned to each variation display (19 variation displays in total). For example, in the base suppression effect table 0, the upper limit of the number of subtracted people is set to "50" in all the fluctuation displays, so that the cumulative upper limit is "950 (50 x 19 = 950)". Here, when the base suppression effect table 5 to 9, 13 to 14, 17 to 19 in which the cumulative upper limit value is set to the initial value or more is selected, the remaining enemy characters are left according to the lottery value of the subtracted number of people. Indicates that the number of people may reach the target value. On the other hand, when the base suppression effect table 0 to 4,10 to 12,15 to 16 in which the cumulative upper limit value is set to less than the initial value is selected, the remaining enemy characters are not affected by the lottery value of the subtracted number of people. Indicates that the number of people is unlikely to reach the target value. In the present embodiment, when the suppression chance mode is scheduled to end in the production section currently being stayed, the remaining number of enemy characters reaches the target value during the execution of the base suppression production (that is, suppression). The base suppression production pattern is based on the number of continuations of this suppression chance mode (the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to this suppression chance mode) so as not to result in a false production result (suggesting the continuation of the chance mode). The selection candidates of are classified.

Subsequently, FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing a lottery table for the base suppression effect. In the figure, for each jackpot type (each symbol group A to D, F to H) for each production section, "○" is displayed in the selection candidate base suppression production table, and non-selection candidate base suppression is shown. The production table is marked with an "x". In the present embodiment, for convenience, the lottery table is configured as a common table in all the staging sections (excluding the fourth staging section), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a different lottery table is used for each staging section. You may prepare it.

When staying in the first production section, for the jackpot type (symbol group A, F) for which the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time (number of electric support times) is set to "20 times", the base suppression where the cumulative upper limit value is less than the initial value. Only the production table is a selection candidate, but the jackpot type (symbol group B, C, D, G,) in which the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time (number of electric support times) is set to "40 times", "60 times", and "10000 times" is set. For I), all base suppression production patterns are candidates for selection.

When staying in the second production section, for the jackpot type (symbol group B, G) for which the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time (number of electric support times) is set to "40 times", the cumulative upper limit is less than the initial value. Only the table is a selection candidate, but for the jackpot type (symbol group C, D, I) for which the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time (number of electric support times) is set to "60 times" and "10000 times", all base suppression effects are produced. The table is a candidate for selection.

When staying in the 3rd production section, for the jackpot type (symbol group C, I) for which the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time (number of electric support times) is set to "60 times", the cumulative upper limit is less than the initial value. Only the effect table is a selection candidate, but for the jackpot type (symbol group D) in which the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time (number of electric support times) is set to "10000 times", all the base suppression effect tables are candidates for selection.

In this embodiment, the base suppression effect is produced by allocating the type of the base suppression effect table in relation to the number of stays in each effect section and the number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support times) given to each jackpot type. There is no discrepancy between the production result of the above and the transition result of the actual production mode. In the figure, the numerical values used for the lottery are omitted for convenience, but in reality, the number of judgments for determining the type of the base suppression effect table according to the acquired lottery random number value (
The range of the lottery random number value) is set, and the type of the base suppression effect table is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number value belongs to.

As shown in FIG. 56, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit in the 1st to 4th staging sections, the bases currently staying (1st base, 2nd base, 3rd base). , 4th base) to the central base. When moving to this central base, a battle effect will be performed in which the ally character will play against the enemy character (boss character). Then, in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it is suggested that the "specific jackpot" is won, and if the ally character is defeated, it is suggested that the "normal jackpot" is won. It should be noted that this battle production basically has the same configuration as the battle production in the above-mentioned phantom battle rush mode, and detailed explanations thereof (such as the route of the battle production) will be omitted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the predetermined value (remaining number of small fish characters) reaches the target value, the base branching effect is successful (the electric support state continues, or the number of electric support times is increased. It was a configuration in which (more than a predetermined number of times) was determined in advance, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the predetermined value becomes the target value in the production mode (effect state) in which the current game state is concealed. Upon reaching the game, it may be determined that the current gaming state is an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a latent probabilistic gaming state).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the predetermined value (remaining number of small fish characters) is reduced each time the variable display of the special symbol is performed, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a special one. The predetermined value may be increased each time the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the target value is the number of defeated small fish characters instead of the production mode in which the remaining number of people is subtracted toward the target value of "0". It may be an effect mode in which the addition is made toward "1000".

[Remaining number notification effect]
Next, the remaining number notification effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the remaining number of times notification effect and the mode branch effect. The remaining number of times notification effect is an effect of notifying the remaining number of times until the variation display number reaches the predetermined number of times in the variation display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the transition from the suppression chance mode to the special mode. In this embodiment, "10 times" is set as a predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the 10-rotation variation display immediately after the transition to the special mode (during the variation display from the 1st rotation to the 10th rotation), the remaining number of times until the variation display number reaches a predetermined number (10 times) is notified. Will be done.

The remaining number of times is displayed in a countdown format on the screen, and is subtracted by "1" each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed once. Of the above-mentioned predetermined number of variations (10 times), the initial value of the remaining number of times notified in the first variation display (first rotation variation display) is "9", and the final variation display (10th rotation). The final value of the remaining number of times notified in (variation display) is "0". The update timing of the remaining number of times is set at the start of each variation display.

Here, when the effect mode currently being executed is a special mode, the gaming state in this special mode is either a normal gaming state or a latent gaming state, and the electric chew support function is provided in any of the gaming states. Since it is not operating, it is difficult for the player to recognize the gaming state in the special mode, and the gaming state is concealed. At this time, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (10 times) without the next big hit occurring in the special mode, the gaming state in the special mode is the normal gaming state. If there is, the specification shifts from the next fluctuation display to the normal mode, and if the gaming state in the special mode is the latent gaming state, the special mode continues in the next fluctuation display. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (10 times) of the variation display, the variation display of the final rotation (10th rotation display) is normally executed after the 10th rotation display is completed. Whether it falls to the mode (whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state), or whether the special mode continues even after the end of the fluctuation display of the 10th rotation (the current gaming state is the latent gaming state). The mode branching effect suggesting) is executed.

[Mode branch effect]
In the mode branching effect, in the variation display at the 10th rotation immediately after shifting to the special mode, is the special mode continued even after the end of the variation display at the 10th rotation according to the display mode of the background image on the screen? It is a production that suggests whether to fall into the mode. The types of this mode branching effect are roughly divided into a mode continuation effect that suggests that the special mode continues after the 10th rotation and a mode end effect that suggests that the special mode ends at the 10th rotation. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the background image (special background image) displayed in the special mode and the background image (normal background image) displayed in the normal mode are basically configured as substantially the same background image. .. Specifically, regardless of whether the effect mode currently being executed is the special mode or the normal mode, the background image shown in FIG. 25 is displayed as the background image. As shown in FIG. 25, the logo icon 731, the ally icon 732, and the companion icons 733 to 735 are displayed in the background image of the normal mode or the special mode.

In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the logo icon 731 of the background image, a normal display mode in which the display color of the logo icon 731 is "white" and a special display mode in which the display color of the logo icon 731 is "rainbow color". Is set. Here, when the currently executing effect mode is the normal mode, the logo icon 731 is always displayed in the normal display mode (white). On the other hand, when the effect mode currently being executed is the special mode, the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode (white) in the variable display from the first rotation to the ninth rotation immediately after the transition to the special mode. On the other hand, in the next 10th rotation variation display, the display mode of the logo icon 731 differs depending on the type of mode branching effect. That is, when the special mode ends at the 10th rotation variation display, the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed as the normal display mode as the mode end effect during the execution of the 10th rotation variation display. When this special mode ends and the mode falls to the normal mode, the logo icon 731 maintains the normal display mode in the variable display of the normal mode. On the other hand, if the special mode continues even in the variation display after the 10th rotation, the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the special display mode as a mode continuation effect during the execution of the variation display at the 10th rotation. When the special mode continues, the display mode of the logo icon 731 maintains the special display mode in the variable display after the 11th rotation. In this way, the mode branch effect continues even after the special mode is displayed in the variable display at the 10th rotation, depending on whether the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode or the special display mode. It suggests that there is a possibility that the special mode will end (fall to the normal mode) in the variable display.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 60, an example of the remaining number notification effect and the mode branch effect in the present embodiment will be described. Here, in FIG. 60, when the gaming state in the special mode is the normal gaming state, the effect proceeds in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) in the figure, and the game in the special mode. When the state is a latent gaming state, the production proceeds in the order of (1) → (2) → (5) → (6) in the figure.

First, when the gaming state in the special mode is the normal gaming state, as shown in (1) in the figure, when the staging mode enters the special mode, "10 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times in the special mode on the screen. Will be done. The logo icon 731 is displayed on the screen in a normal display mode (white).

As shown in (2) in the figure, when the variation display of the first rotation of the special mode is started, the remaining number of times in the special mode is subtracted once, and "9 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times. After that, each time the variable display is started, the remaining number display in the special mode is subtracted once. The logo icon 731 is continuously displayed on the screen in the normal display mode (white).

As shown in (3) in the figure, when the variation display of the 10th rotation of the special mode (variation display of the final number of predetermined times) is started, "0 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times in the special mode. , The mode end effect in which the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the normal display mode is performed. By performing this mode end effect, the player is suggested or notified that the player will fall to the normal mode from the next fluctuation display (the current gaming state is the normal gaming state).

As shown in (4) in the figure, when the effect mode falls from the special mode to the normal mode, the remaining number of times display disappears from the screen and the logo icon 731 is displayed as it is in the normal display mode. Then, the normal mode continues until the next big hit occurs.

On the other hand, when the gaming state in the special mode is the latent gaming state, as shown in (5) in the figure, the variation display of the 10th rotation of the special mode (variation display of the final round of a predetermined number of times) is started. Then, "0 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times in the special mode, and the mode continuation effect in which the display mode of the logo icon 731 is displayed in the special display mode (rainbow color) is performed. By performing this mode continuation effect, it is suggested or notified to the player that the special mode will continue even in the variable display from the next time onward (the current gaming state is the latent gaming state).

As shown in (5) in the figure, when the 11th rotation of the special mode is started (when the special mode continues), the remaining number of times display of the special mode disappears from the screen, and the logo icon 731 is displayed as it is. It is displayed in. Then, the special mode continues until the next big hit occurs.

[Standby demo production]
Next, the standby demonstration effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a timing chart of the standby demo effect. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state (low probability low base state), a standby demonstration effect (for example, playing a moving image for demonstration on the screen) is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Demonstration production waiting for customers) is executed. The predetermined conditions are (1) that the effect mode is the normal mode, and (2) that the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer. In addition, as described above, "the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that the period in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. It means that the period continues for a predetermined time or more, the period in which the game ball does not enter or pass through all the winning openings continues for a predetermined time or more, the period in which the game ball is not launched continues for a predetermined time or more, etc. do. The end condition of this standby demo effect is when the interrupted state of the game is released (when the game is started or restarted), and specifically, the game ball is sent to the first start port 51 or the second start port 52. When the ball enters, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, when the operation holding ball of the special symbol is generated, when the rotation operation of the launch handle 12 for launching the game ball is detected, and so on. .. On the other hand, when the game ball enters (passes) into the operation gate 53, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, or when the operation hold ball of the normal symbol occurs, the game ball goes to the general winning openings 61 to 64. The standby demo production does not end when the ball enters. Further, on the standby demo screen, a cross-shaped switch (a cross key, a cross button, etc., which is different from the effect button used in the button effect (operation request effect)), which is one of the effect buttons 15, is used. By operating it, the volume of the sound output from the game machine can be adjusted. In this case, even if the operation related to the volume adjustment is performed, the standby demo screen does not end, two screens can be displayed at the same time, and the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the standby demo screen. It may be displayed, that is, the relationship of display priority may be set as "volume adjustment screen> standby demo screen". Further, the volume may be adjusted even when the standby demo screen is not displayed. For example, the volume may be adjusted during variable display or special game execution.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main control board 100 determines that the interrupted state of the game has continued for a predetermined time or longer, a standby demo command is transmitted, and the customer waiting demo command is output by the staging control board 200. The configuration was such that the standby demo effect was started when the command was received, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the effect control board 200 determines that the interrupted state of the game has continued for a predetermined time or longer (main control board 100). It may be configured to start the standby demo effect after determining that the fluctuation start command from is not received for a predetermined time or longer).

In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as the effect modes during the normal game state (low probability low base state), but even if the current game state is the normal game state, the current effect When the mode is a special mode, the standby demo effect is not performed even if the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer. The reason is that when the current production mode is a special mode (whether the game state is a normal game state, a latent game state, or a concealed state), the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. This is because when the standby demo effect is started as an opportunity, the player knows that the current game state is the normal game state due to the occurrence of this standby demo effect. In other words, after shifting to the special mode, the player intentionally interrupts the game, and the current game state can be grasped depending on whether or not the standby demo production is started after the lapse of the predetermined time. This is because it is possible to continue the game if it is in a definite game state and end the game if it is in a normal game state. Therefore, when the effect mode during the normal game state is the normal mode, the standby demo effect is executed when the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer, while the effect mode during the normal game state is the special mode. In some cases, a special mode in which the game progresses in a concealed manner by not executing the standby demo effect (by ignoring the standby demo command) even if the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to sufficiently guarantee the playability of.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 62 to 75. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<< Main processing on the main control side >>
62 to 63 are flowcharts showing the main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program is started and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as the initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and the access permission of the RAM 103 is granted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table in which the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power off normal information is stored (S6).

Here, when the information on the normal power failure is saved (S6: YES), the RAM 103
The checksum is calculated for the predetermined area of (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it is backed up normally, the checksum at power-on will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of turning on the power whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, when the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of turning on the power is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

Next, in the power-off / recovery setting process, the power-on normal information is set, various errors are initially set, and the communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 is sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the information of the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and the power off / return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power supply off / return command”) at the time of power failure / recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is performed (S15). This power-off / recovery command includes information on the communication line inspection, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy ball entry states, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. The untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of operation-holding balls is requested (. S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is in the open state) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 54 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (a flag indicating that the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, the clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power cut, the value of the power cut confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power cut has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, in this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition processing (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to utilize the remaining time from S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. Then, when an interrupt request is made in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, when the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, when the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 and the power-off processing described below is executed.

Next, as the power cutoff processing (S26 to S32), first, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is the power-on normal data (S27). In the case of power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, when the power-on normal information is not (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

Next, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by writing the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 in order to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset time-out time. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before the time-out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input process is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, and the magnetic sensor. , Radio sensor, etc. are read, their status is determined, and then these detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this various random number update process, a normal symbol variation pattern random number, a special symbol variation pattern random number, and a special symbol variation addition pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) from the previous random number.
Is subtracted. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, a random number per normal symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. When the value of the counter goes around once, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, the timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by the interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, confirmed display time) related to the fluctuation display and the stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72. A specified fluctuation time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. If the small hit game of the other special symbol is executed during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the small hit games is being executed. The timekeeping of the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and as the determination result, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set.

Next, the winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the large winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switch 611, 641 in the input process (S53) is used. Based on this, when the switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed and it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition to temporarily storing the game ball, a transmission request for an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is performed. The details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 in order to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type, and the payout control board 400 is used, based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize ball monitoring process. The data received from is monitored and the communication with the payout control board 400 is inspected.

Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation hold ball information. , The number of pending balls is updated up to a maximum of 4, and the random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery are stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 is performed, the normal symbol changing process and the normal symbol stop symbol display process are performed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. , Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessory, processing during demonstration during operation of ordinary electric accessory, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner or to confirm it.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, when the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, one normal symbol operation pending ball number is digested and the normal symbol is activated. The hit / fail judgment, the symbol judgment, the fluctuation pattern judgment, the fluctuation time setting, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 is monitored, and if the game ball is won, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is related. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbol storage, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the special symbol change start process (S420) and the special symbol change process (S430), which will be described in detail later, are performed according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), Processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, the special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and end of the special electric accessory 542 are set as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 542, and the operation is large. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, and the like are executed in order.

Next, the large winning opening validity period setting process is executed (S67). In this large winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the large winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the large winning opening 54 is set as the determination result.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol exists, one reserved ball is digested, a command request for the number of symbol storage numbers, and a hit / fail judgment of the special symbol are made. , Design determination of special symbol, determination of probability fluctuation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric accessory, setting of demo production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball entry passage time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball entry passage time abnormality is set and the effect control command including the error information (“error”). In addition to requesting the effect specification command "), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to the external terminal.

Next, the game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated (the number of specified rounds), the number of balls on hold for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. Further, display data for displaying the error state information detected by the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, the LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S65), in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, display an error, and the like. Display data created by abnormality detection processing (S69), game status display processing (S71), etc. can be used for each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol hold lamp 73, 74, and normal figure hold. The data is output to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, the firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 and the game ball is allowed to be launched. do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the data was acquired in the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) in order to operate each electric accessory 542. Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, the effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the staging control board 200.

Next, the external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, the game information related to the game machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. Examples of the external information signal include a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, a big hit signal, and a continuous villa signal. There is a symbol confirmation signal and so on.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during the main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-masqueradable interrupt is generated and the power outage confirmation flag is turned on. do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power-off processing (S)
26 to S32) will be executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time as storing, a first start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 521 is input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time as storing, a second start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Next, the operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the actuated gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the actuated gate switch 531 is input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate winning is won. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the large winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the big winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541 is input, the large winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , A large winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611, 641 is input. When the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 611 and 641 is input, the general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 61 to 64 is stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. Along with temporary storage, a general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. Applies to.

(Starting port monitoring control processing)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning of the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the lottery random number value related to the first special symbol game is a random number value per special symbol, a random number value per special symbol, or a special symbol. The variation pattern random number value and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). ). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is added by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 51 is completed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205). When the winning of the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). When the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number value per special symbol, the symbol random number value per special symbol, and the special symbol are used as the lottery random number values related to the second special symbol game. The variation pattern random number value and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number are acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207. ). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is added by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is completed.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). When the number of operation-reserved balls is updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area of 180 (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (S211). In the case of the pre-judgment timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading judgment information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the start opening, a special symbol hit random number is generated from the hit random number buffer (reserved n storage area or register, etc.). A numerical value is read out and a pre-determination of success or failure is performed (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (hit / fail pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the hit symbol random number buffer, and the symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern advance determination command including the information of the advance determination result (variation pattern advance determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol change start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol change start monitoring process described later is performed on the special symbol side of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that satisfies the change start condition. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, the processing on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

First, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for change)". It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special It is considered that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). , The process shifts to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to be digested. The details of this special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). .. Here, when the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the change start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (hereinafter). After setting (addresses of various tables used in the process and addresses of the RAM storage area) (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

If both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change start conditions are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. ..

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the change start of this time is started with reference to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, the processing method on the first special symbol side is the same except for special cases. It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is a process or a process on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of pending balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the start of this fluctuation, is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of the current fluctuation start is accessed, and the random value per special symbol and the special symbol per special symbol stored in the earliest reserved storage area (hold 1 storage area). The symbol random value, the special symbol variation pattern random value, and the special symbol variation addition pattern random value are read out in order, and these random values are used for the special symbol hit / fail determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process, which will be described later. For use in (S423), transfer to a special symbol hit / miss determination area, a special symbol symbol determination area, a special symbol variation pattern determination area, and a special symbol variation addition pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the reserved storage area, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area to the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reserved storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol winning / failing determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol winning / failing determination process (S320), first, the special symbol winning / failing lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability change state, the high-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the low-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired. Next, a random number value per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, the values corresponding to the hit / fail determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, loss data “00H”) are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, the symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol and the character effect number (variable additional symbol information) of the special symbol are determined according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) and the character effect number of the special symbol determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability change on of the special symbol / probability change off of the special symbol / probability change on of the normal symbol). / Determined based on the combination with (4 patterns of probability variation off of ordinary symbols). If the result of the hit / fail determination is wrong, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the hit / miss determination of the special symbol is incorrect (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

When the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit (S342: YES), after the big hit game is completed, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The number of probability fluctuations is determined as the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (S345). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of times the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the big hit game is the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened. Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of electric support is determined as the number of times the electric chew support function is activated after the big hit game is completed (). S347). This determination result (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number, electric support number) is stored in the time reduction number storage area and the electric support number storage area of the main information storage means 180. Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current gaming state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game or after the small hit game is set (S349). Subsequently, the demo production time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (S350). Next, the special symbol hit / miss determination area and the special symbol symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / miss determination process (S320) and symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (standby)" to "01H (start of change)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402).

When the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is used to execute the processing related to the second special symbol. (Addresses of various tables and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The address of various tables used and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is used, and the special subject to this change is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in special cases? , The second special symbol processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the side. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) for shifting to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status (“01H”, “02H”, “03H”) is executed. do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is not 0 (S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol change start process (S420). The details of this special symbol change start processing (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (during fluctuation)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). The details of this special symbol change processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

(Special symbol change start processing)
Next, the special symbol change start processing (S420) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start processing (S420).

First, the main variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and one of a plurality of types of main variation patterns is selected with reference to the main variation pattern table (S422).

Next, the main variation addition table is acquired based on the main variation pattern selected in S422 (S423). Subsequently, the special symbol variation addition pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area, and one of a plurality of types of main variation addition patterns is selected with reference to the main variation addition table (S424).

Subsequently, the fluctuation time (basic fluctuation time + fluctuation addition time) corresponding to the main fluctuation pattern and the main fluctuation addition pattern selected this time is set (S425). Then, as a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S426), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S427). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a communication inspection command, a variation addition symbol information specification command, a variation pattern specification command, and a symbol specification command are generated in order, and these are used as the main information storage means. Stored in the command storage area of 180.

Subsequently, the content of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern is cleared (S428). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (S429).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the processing during special symbol change (S430) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change processing (S430).

First, in order to display the variation of the special symbol, the display pattern number switching process of the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbol in a variable manner or a definite display.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (time-out)", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has expired (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol ends (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be definitely displayed is set on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 (S433). Subsequently, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the fixed display time in the special symbol game timer (S435). The "fixed display time" is a time for deterministically stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is stopped fluctuating. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (time-out)", that is, whether or not the final display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has expired (S441). Here, when the final display time of the special symbol ends (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stop symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data “55H” (S443). When the hit / fail determination data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) in order. Specifically, "00H (off)" is set in the probability variation flag, and "00H" is set in the probability fluctuation count counter, the fluctuation time shortening count counter, and the ball entry easy state count counter to clear zero.

Next, as the start demo setting process of the special game, the start demo display time is set and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, in order to clear the contents of the hit / fail determination flag, "00H" is set (S450).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination data is not the jackpot data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451). When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S452). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation number counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (S455). When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S456). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction frequency counter is zero (step S457). When the variation time reduction counter is zero (S457: YES), it is assumed that the number of terminations of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S458). If the fluctuation time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is operating (S459). When the electric chew support function is operating (S459: YES), the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support count counter is zero (step S461). When the electric support count counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of times of the end of the easy entry state has been reached. If the number of times of electric support after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the number of times of the variation pattern selection state of the main information storage means 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset number of ends, and the number of ends is determined. If it has been reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the number of ends has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and fluctuation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451 to S464 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in (S465). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 74 to 75 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started in each round game.

When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored as a command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area (S504). The effect control board 200 side executes a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processes S506 to S510 are executed as the processes during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 is also determined. It is determined whether or not (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball wins only the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), it is special. The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (S509). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by 1 (S510).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511 and the end demo display time is set as the hit end demo setting process for the special game. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction count information set in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction counter (S512). Further, the electric support count information set in S347 is stored in the electric support count counter (S513).

Subsequently, with reference to the content of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is the operation by the specific symbol (so-called probabilistic symbol) (S514).
When the condition device is operated by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation number (operation data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is stored. The operation of the probability fluctuation function of (S515) is started. On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operating data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter, and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction count information stored in the time reduction counter is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S516). In the case of the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is the electric chew support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). In the case of the electric chew support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the start of operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S519), the start of the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S520), and the start of the operation of the open extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S521) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chew support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and this is used by the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S523). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S524).

<Processing on the staging control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the staging control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 to 81. The processing on the effect control board 200 side is a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. The lamp is activated when the processing, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command activated by the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the arrival of the predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern. It is configured to include effect interrupt processing and transmission interrupt processing of image control commands that are activated at regular intervals.

In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset: Top priority", "Reset start processing due to various abnormalities: Top priority" → "Reception interrupt processing of production control command: Level 7" → "WDT (when runaway is detected) The priority levels are ranked in the order of "reset start processing: level 3" → "image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2" → "effect control side timer interrupt processing: level 1". The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, or when the sub-main CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are exemplified, but other interrupt processing actually exists.

In the main process on the effect control side, basically, the process is performed after setting either the state of prohibiting all interrupts or the state of prohibiting interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the main process on the effect control side is in the interrupt enable state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, in principle, the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. The interrupt request is permitted, but the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or the interrupt processing has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process is processed in a state in which other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are disabled. Then, each interrupt process returns to the effect control side main process with all interrupts enabled. The priority order (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the staging control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the staging control board 200 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a reset start process of the staging control board 200. In this reset start process, it is started by any of the reset when the power is turned on, the reset caused by various abnormalities, and the reset caused by WDT (when runaway is detected), and after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the staging control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the variable without the initial value is initialized by clearing 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 to the RAM 203.

Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in common for each model in advance, a process of setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Further, a request to turn off the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) is made to turn off all the lamps (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, the effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). The details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When shifting to the main process on the effect control side in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that a bug in the program occurs, the process returns to this process. To transition to a small power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

<< Main processing on the staging control side >>
Next, the staging control side main process (S609) of the staging control board 200 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, the address for starting the check whether the control program is correctly expanded in the RAM 203 in the main process on the staging control side (the start address where the program is expanded).
Is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (starting of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of reset), and the operation of the movable accessory 24 is controlled by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the required location information. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is set by writing a predetermined clear word to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within the preset time-out time. It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Subsequently, the input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the read of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S912 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored for each interrupt occurrence, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). When all the input port states are "1", the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", when all are "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and in other cases, the signal level is set. Do not change (this confirms the input signal).

Subsequently, the error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effect by various devices is started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button notice effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within the predetermined operation effective time, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored. To hold.

Subsequently, the advance notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a advance notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern is generated according to the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). It will be decided by lottery. The advance notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the advance notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for designating the advance notice effect pattern number on the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, when the character advance notice effect pattern is selected as the advance notice effect pattern, a character request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). .. In this example, all of the plurality of types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) generated within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn by lottery in one main loop process, but the efficiency of the main loop processing is improved. In order to make the notice effect occur, the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes by dividing it into each time when the advance notice effect occurs (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, the advance notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the change of the decorative pattern needs to be synchronized with the start of the change of the decorative pattern (the image control command is sent immediately), so a lottery is performed in the starting main loop process. It is supposed to do.

Next, the device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 are stored. ), The pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, character advance notice effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, the one-frame time corresponds to the time required for the one-frame drawing process when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the staging display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, the drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when all the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

Subsequently, the command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. The effect control process corresponding to the type of is executed. The details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

Then, it is determined whether or not the command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) is executed during the loop processing this time (S621). Immediately after command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and the process proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the staging lottery random number update process is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In the present embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the time of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead advance notice lottery random number, a decorative symbol random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a pre-determination command. When this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this hold information management process (S634), the symbol storage number command or the advance determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, the look-ahead determination is executed based on the information of the advance determination result, and the hold image of the effect display device 70 is executed. A process for updating the number of reserved images displayed on the display unit 710 and the display mode (display color, etc.) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol fluctuation-related commands include a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation-related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation-related command stops variation. If it is a command, the process for ending the variation effect of the decorative pattern is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demo effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demo effect command. When the jackpot effect-related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demo effect, a round effect, and an end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related command includes a small hit start demo effect command and a small hit end demo effect command. When the command related to the small hit effect is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In this small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demo effect and a small hit end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S641). When this error effect specification command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S642), an error effect specification command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and an error effect pattern for notifying the error state by lighting the effect lamp LP, the sound of the speaker 11, or the like is determined. ..

If the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO), do nothing. The command analysis process is terminated.

<< Reception interrupt processing of staging control command >>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the staging control command will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing of the staging control command. As described above, the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command is started when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become like. The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will be referred to as a “first command”, and the EVENT data will be referred to as a “second command”.

First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the staging control command is fixed (S901). Specifically, the input value is fixed when the command data is read up to 5 times and the same value is read twice in succession. This is because the reading of the staging control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not fixed until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). When the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). It should be noted that the time when the effect lottery random number is acquired is the time when the effect control command is received, that is, the effect control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol changes. Therefore, by taking this as an opportunity, it is necessary to prevent periodicity in the acquisition time. By making the acquisition time of the staging lottery random numbers irregular in this way, inconveniences such as the same staging being unnaturally and repeatedly selected in various staging lottery are less likely to occur.

On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Timer interrupt processing on the staging control side >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the staging control side will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, the port input / output process is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, the device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, the drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for the effect operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the time such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, the button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation effective time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is effective.

Subsequently, the task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the value of the task counter (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (lamp data update processing of S917) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process of S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process of S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values ("0" to "15") is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and one other value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Subsequently, the lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data of the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs each bit to the lamp connection board 91 in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, so that all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is used. It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the above is out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the staging control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, the error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after making all interrupts permitted and restoring the contents of the saved register, the timer interrupt process on the staging control side is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Transmission interrupt processing of image control commands >>
Next, the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a transmission interrupt process of an image control command. The transmission interrupt process of this image control command occurs at predetermined fixed intervals (500 μs).

In the transmission interrupt process of this image control command, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

The main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows. First, according to the present embodiment, the game machine specifications other than the pseudo-ream effect (pseudo-ream) are further improved by a new pseudo-ream effect that does not merely perform the pseudo-variable display a plurality of times. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by a new effect different from the effect, a new effect display method and control method, a new game playability, etc.).

Further, according to the present embodiment, as a pre-production of the pseudo-repeating (true pseudo-repeating effect), the pseudo-repeating of Gase (fake pseudo-repeating effect) is interrupted, and the pseudo-repeating is performed again. By making it look as if it was done, it is possible to give various variations to the way of showing the pseudo-continuous fanning, so it is possible to create a complex and diverse game production (pseudo-continuous fanning production) that has never existed before. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in a situation where a Musou connection state in which two auras are possessed occurs, it depends on whether or not the pseudo-continuous fanning is redone using the aura (that is, Musou). (Depending on whether or not the connected state can be maintained), the degree of expectation that the pseudo-ream will succeed in the next pseudo-variation will differ, and the player's interest will be attracted to each pseudo-reaction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the pseudo-ream, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, although the production mode (companion participation production pattern) of each companion participation production is different, the result is the same production result (same number of participants or the same number of auras). In that case, by differentiating the jackpot expectation according to the production mode (companion participation production pattern) of each time, it is possible to create a complex and diverse game production that has never existed before. , It is possible to realize a game production that does not make the player feel bored, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the reach effect type or the number of pseudo-reams is specified by the main variation pattern, while the execution number of each element effect is specified by the main variation addition pattern, whereby the main variation pattern and the main are specified. Based on the combination with the variable addition pattern, while suppressing the amount of data on the main control board, the types of the variable pattern are substantially increased to diversify the variation of the combination of the reach effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the element effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more effective production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the display priority between the decorative symbol and the reserved image is switched according to the operation state (variable display state / stop display state) of the decorative symbol, and the display priority is changed according to the game situation. Since the image with the higher priority can be visually recognized preferentially to the player, the display effect of the decorative pattern and the display effect of the reserved image can coexist without interfering with each other's effect. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the reserved image and the changing image have different display sizes to clearly differentiate them from each other, but a common display mode (normal display mode / special display mode) is used between the two images. ) Is adopted to have a series of staging relationships and cooperation from the occurrence of the hold to the digestion (until the end of the change display), so that the hold image and the changing image can be separated. It is possible to realize a game effect (holding change effect) that is unified as a whole while clearly distinguishing it, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while the operation display of each reserved image is performed in an individual operation mode for each production stage, the operation display of each reserved image is given a certain degree of regularity to give a sense of unity in the operation display. By doing so, it is possible to create a novel hold display effect that has never existed before, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the process of a series of battle productions in which there is a certain degree of rule between the battle result and the game result, that is, "specific jackpot" if the battle is won and "normal jackpot" if the battle is lost. By reflecting the player's operation more flexibly in the battle production and enhancing the production effect of the battle production and the player participation type production, it is possible to create a complex and diverse game production that has never existed before. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a big hit (so-called accident hit) of the second special symbol occurs in the fluctuation display of the first rotation after the electric support is removed, even if it is actually one rotation, it is a normal game. Although the jackpot consecutive villa state is interrupted by falling into the state, by letting the production mode stay in the revenge mode corresponding to the time-saving game state and continuing the jackpot consecutive villa information as it is (pseudo in the production) By continuing the villa state), the player can be recognized as if the villa state continues without diminishing the player's willingness to play, and the second after the electric support is removed. The player does not feel uncomfortable with the big hit of the special symbol, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state and the effect mode is the special mode, the standby demo effect (customer) is exceptionally even if the standby state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer. By prohibiting the occurrence of the waiting demo effect), even if the player intentionally interrupts the game and generates the standby state of the game, the current game state (normal game) depends on whether or not the standby demo effect occurs. Since it is possible to prevent the state (state, latent game state) from being exposed (previously) in advance, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

Further, according to the present embodiment, the number of executions of a plurality of types of element effects (companion participation effect, aura connection effect, aura use effect) is specified by one main variation addition pattern, so that the pattern variation effect (reach) is specified. It is possible to increase the variation of the combination of each element staging added to the staging and pseudo-staging), to reduce the amount of data (storage capacity) of the main control board, and to perform a wide variety of game staging during the variable display of the design. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of sub-variation addition patterns corresponding to one main variation addition pattern are provided, and the subs are based on the number of executions of each element effect specified by one main variation addition pattern. Since the execution timing of each element effect can be different for each variable addition pattern, it is possible to perform a wide variety of game effects during the variable display of the symbol while suppressing the amount of data (storage capacity) of the main control board. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of each element effect from becoming monotonous, and to enhance the effect of the special effect, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a sub-variation addition pattern in which the same main variation addition pattern is sub-expanded is selected, selection candidates for the sub-variation addition pattern are selected according to the type of the sub-variation addition pattern associated with the sub-variation addition pattern. By making them different, it is possible to realize a wide variety of variation effects while suppressing the amount of data (storage capacity) of the main control board, and at the same time, execute each element effect for each variation effect scenario specified by the sub-variation pattern. By making the timing different, the effect of the special effect can be enhanced, and as a result, the fun of the game can be improved. Furthermore, by making the special production and the reach production related to each other, the entire production becomes unified, and the player's interest is attracted to the content of the special production (number of participants). As a result, the player's expectation for the generation of reach production can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, although the base suppression effect table is assigned according to the jackpot type (number of times of electric support given) that triggers the transition to the suppression chance mode this time, the base suppression effect table is assigned. The progress pattern for each variation display is specified, and the subtraction value or addition value is determined almost randomly within the range that does not exceed the upper limit value for each progress pattern, so the randomness that does not make the player bored. It is possible to create a high variety of game productions, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

[Modification example]
Next, a modification of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above, and the portions having the same configuration will be described below with the same reference numerals. Is omitted, and the different parts are mainly explained.

<Common modification 1>
In the above embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, a normal probabilistic gaming machine that determines the presence / absence of the probabilistic transition based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol is adopted. It is not limited, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, it is judged whether or not there is a probability change transition depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the big hit game. A probabilistic gaming machine may be adopted. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, a probabilistic gaming state given as a trigger of a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, up to a preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times). Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive latent probability changing gaming states may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment, the special symbol probability variation function is configured as a normal probability variable machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs, but the special symbol probability variation function has a specified number of STs. It may be configured as a number-cutting probability changer that operates continuously only (for example, 100 times).

<Common deformation example 2>
In the above embodiment, a model having only one large winning opening in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model having a plurality of large winning openings in the game area is applied. You may. In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V-probability changing gaming machine is provided with a specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability fluctuation function of a special symbol. It may be equipped with two or more large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area). As an example of the board layout, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or horizontally side by side in the right side area of the game area, or the first large winning opening may be arranged. The board area to be created and the board area in which the second large winning opening is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out when the game ball enters the first big prize opening and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big winning opening. The number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) may be the same or different. Of the two big winning openings, the first major winning opening (or the second major winning opening) is for the big winning opening for small hit games, and the second big winning opening (or the first big winning opening) is for big hit games. It may be configured as a big winning opening. In that case, even if the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize opening for small hit games is 10, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize openings for big hit games is 15. good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability changing gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated and the variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability change game state is defined as the game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. May be good. In addition, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is divided into the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the latent probability variation game state is divided into the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the first. 2 It may be defined as a gaming state in which the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time) It may operate independently of the shortening function).

Next, in order to make it easier to clearly understand the technical significance of the present embodiment and the modified examples, the problems corresponding to the above-described embodiments and the modified examples will be outlined.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, it is known to perform a so-called pseudo-continuous effect in which a single variation display of a decorative pattern showing the result of a hit / fail judgment is shown as a plurality of pseudo variation displays. (For example, refer to "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-50700").

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, before the hit / fail judgment is executed, a preliminary judgment is made for the undigested operation holding ball, a holding image based on the result of this preliminary judgment is displayed, and the holding image is displayed according to the display mode. There is known one that executes a so-called pending change effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-213021").

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the so-called reach state, it is developed into a reach effect such as a battle effect, and the type of big hit is selected according to the effect result of the reach effect. Something that suggests is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-85669).

It is known that the conventional pachinko gaming machine has a plurality of types of effect modes and executes a variable effect of a decorative pattern based on a background image according to the type of effect mode currently being executed (for example). See "Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-54122").

It is known that conventional pachinko gaming machines execute a demonstration effect for waiting for customers (so-called standby demo effect) when the waiting state of a game continues for a predetermined time or longer (for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-". 111115 Publication No. ”).

Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to have a large number of fluctuation patterns in order to increase variations such as reach production and pseudo-continuous production (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714). ).

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative pattern, there are those that perform reach production and advance notice production that suggest the high degree of expectation for transition to special games (big hit expectation) in advance. It is known (see, for example, "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-16106").

However, since many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is required to further improve the interest of the game in order to differentiate from the conventional models. ..

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above embodiment and the modified example, the above-mentioned configuration is adopted for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, and the above-mentioned action and effect are achieved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and modifications, and can be appropriately improved as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. In addition, each component described in the above-described embodiment and modification is appropriately combined, or a part of each component described in the above-described embodiment and modification is deleted or converted by a well-known / conventional technique or the like. Also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area PA1 Left area PA2 Right area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Direction button 20 Game board 51 First start port 52 Second start port 53 Operation gate 54 Large winning port 70 Production display device 71 1st special symbol display device 72 2nd special symbol display device 100 Main control board 200 Staging control board 220 Staging control means 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board 600 External information terminal board 511 1st start port switch 521 2nd Start port switch 541 Large winning port switch 710 Hold image display area 720 Fluctuating image display area

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A starting port provided in the game area where a game ball can enter,
A random number acquisition means for acquiring a predetermined random number value triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and
A winning / failing determination means that executes a winning / failing determination based on a winning / failing random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquiring means.
A variation pattern determining means for performing a main variation pattern lottery that determines a main variation pattern based on a main variation pattern random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means.
Based on the main fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means, a symbol display device in which a special symbol showing the result of the hit / fail determination is displayed in a variable manner and stopped is displayed.
A special game execution means that can shift to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit.
An effect display device that displays a predetermined effect, and
It is provided with an effect determining means for determining an effect to be displayed on the effect display device.
The main variation addition pattern lottery for determining the main variation addition pattern is performed based on the main variation addition pattern random number value among the predetermined random number values acquired by the random number acquisition means.
The basic fluctuation time of the special symbol is specified by the main fluctuation pattern,
The variable addition time of the special symbol is specified by the main variation addition pattern, and the variation addition time is specified.
The variation display time of the special symbol can be configured to consist of the total time of the basic variation time of the special symbol specified by the main variation pattern and the variation addition time of the special symbol specified by the main variation addition pattern. Ori,
The sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern corresponding to the combination of the main variation pattern determined in the main variation pattern lottery and the main variation addition pattern determined in the main variation addition pattern lottery are determined.
It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the sub-variation pattern and the sub-variation addition pattern.
A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and / or a certain main variation addition pattern, and one sub-variation pattern among the plurality of sub-variation patterns is determined.
A plurality of sub-variation addition patterns are associated with a certain main variation pattern and / or a certain main variation addition pattern, and one of the plurality of sub-variation addition patterns is determined. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured.

Images